TI SM32C6711DGDPI20EP

SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
D Controlled Baseline
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D L1/L2 Memory Architecture
− One Assembly/Test Site, One Fabrication
Site
Enhanced Diminishing Manufacturing
Sources (DMS) Support
Enhanced Product-Change Notification
Qualification Pedigree†
Excellent-Price/Performance Floating-Point
Digital Signal Processors (DSPs):
320C67x (C6711, C6711B, C6711C, and
C6711D)
− Eight 32-Bit Instructions/Cycle
− 100-,150-,167-,200-,250-MHz Clock Rates
− 10-, 6.7-, 6-, 5-, 4-ns Instruction Cycle
Time
− 600, 900, 1000, 1200, 1500 MFLOPS
Advanced Very Long Instruction Word
(VLIW) C67x DSP Core
− Eight Highly Independent Functional
Units:
− Four ALUs (Floating- and Fixed-Point)
− Two ALUs (Fixed-Point)
− Two Multipliers (Floating- and
Fixed-Point)
− Load-Store Architecture With 32 32-Bit
General-Purpose Registers
− Instruction Packing Reduces Code Size
− All Instructions Conditional
Instruction Set Features
− Hardware Support for IEEE
Single-Precision and Double-Precision
Instructions
− Byte-Addressable (8-, 16-, 32-Bit Data)
− 8-Bit Overflow Protection
− Saturation
− Bit-Field Extract, Set, Clear
− Bit-Counting
− Normalization
Device Configuration
− Boot Mode: HPI, 8-, 16-, 32-Bit ROM Boot
− Endianness: Little Endian, Big Endian
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
− 32K-Bit (4K-Byte) L1P Program Cache
(Direct Mapped)
− 32K-Bit (4K-Byte) L1D Data Cache
(2-Way Set-Associative)
− 512K-Bit (64K-Byte) L2 Unified Mapped
RAM/Cache
(Flexible Data/Program Allocation)
Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)
Controller (16 Independent Channels)
32-Bit External Memory Interface (EMIF)
− Glueless Interface to Asynchronous
Memories: SRAM and EPROM
− Glueless Interface to Synchronous
Memories: SDRAM and SBSRAM
− 256M-Byte Total Addressable External
Memory Space
16-Bit Host-Port Interface (HPI)
Two Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports
(McBSPs)
− Direct Interface to T1/E1, MVIP, SCSA
Framers
− ST-Bus-Switching Compatible
− Up to 256 Channels Each
− AC97-Compatible
− Serial-Peripheral-Interface (SPI)
Compatible (Motorola)
Two 32-Bit General-Purpose Timers
Flexible Phase-Locked-Loop (PLL) Clock
Generator [C6711/11B]
Flexible Software Configurable PLL-Based
Clock Generator Module [C6711C/11D]
A Dedicated General-Purpose Input/Output
(GPIO) Module With 5 Pins [C6711C/11D]
IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG‡)
Boundary-Scan-Compatible
CMOS Technology
− 0.13-µm/6-Level Copper Metal Process
(C6711C/C6711D)
− 0.18-µm/5-Level Copper Metal Process
(C6711/11B)
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
320C67x and C67x are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Motorola is a trademark of Motorola, Inc.
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
† Component qualification in accordance with JEDEC and industry standards to ensure reliable operation over an extended temperature range. This includes, but
is not limited to, Highly Accelerated Stress Test (HAST) or biased 85/85, temperature cycle, autoclave or unbiased HAST, electromigration, bond intermetallic life,
and mold compound life. Such qualification testing should not be viewed as justifying use of this component beyond specified performance and environmental limits.
‡ IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
Copyright  2005, Texas Instruments Incorporated
!"#$ #$%# #&'!%$# # ('$ # !'" $%# #" (%"
& ")"*(!"#$+ " $%$ & "% ")" #%$" # $" (%,"-.
("&/#, $ "*"$'%* %'%$"'$+
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
1
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Table of Contents
GFN BGA package (bottom view) [C6711/11B only] . . . . . . 3
GDP BGA package (bottom view) [C6711C/11D only] . . . . 3
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
device characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
device compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CPU (DSP core) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
memory map summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
peripheral register descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
signal groups description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
device configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
development support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
documentation support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CPU CSR register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
cache configuration (CCFG) register description (11D) . . . 41
interrupt sources and interrupt selector [C6711/11B only] . 42
interrupt sources and interrupt selector [11C/11D only] . . . 43
EDMA channel synchronization events [C6711/11B only] . 44
EDMA module and EDMA selector [C6711C/11D only] . . . 45
clock PLL [C6711/11B only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/C6711D only] . . . . . . . . . 49
general-purpose input/output (GPIO) [11C/11D only . . . . . 56
power-down mode logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power-supply sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power-supply decoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMIF device speed (C6711/C6711B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMIF device speed (C6711C/C6711D only) . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMIF big endian mode correctness [C6711D only] . . . . . .
2
bootmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
absolute maximum ratings over operating case
temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
recommended operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of
supply voltage and operating case temperature
for C6711/C6711B only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of
supply voltage and operating case temperature
for C6711C/C6711D only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
65
66
67
parameter measurement information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
signal transition levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
timing parameters and board routing analysis . . . . . . 69
input and output clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
asynchronous memory timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
synchronous-burst memory timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
synchronous DRAM timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
HOLD/HOLDA timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
BUSREQ timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
reset timing [C6711/11B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
reset timing [C6711C/11D] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
external interrupt timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
host-port interface timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
multichannel buffered serial port timing . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
timer timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
general-purpose input/output (GPIO) port timing
[C6711C/C6711D only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
JTAG test-port timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
mechanical data [C6711/11B only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
mechanical data [C6711C/11D only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
57
59
61
61
61
62
63
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
63
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
GFN BGA package (bottom view) [C6711/11B only]
GFN 256-PIN BALL GRID ARRAY (BGA) PACKAGE
( BOTTOM VIEW )
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
13
12
15
14
17
16
19
18
20
GDP BGA package (bottom view) [C6711C/11D only]
GDP 272-PIN BALL GRID ARRAY (BGA) PACKAGE
( BOTTOM VIEW )
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
3
1
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11 13 15 17 19
10 12 14 16 18 20
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
3
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
description
The 320C67x DSPs (including the SM320C6711-EP, SM320C6711B-EP, SM320C6711C-EP,
SM320C6711D-EP devices†) compose the floating-point DSP family in the TMS320C6000 DSP platform. The
C6711, C6711B, C6711C, and C6711D devices are based on the high-performance, advanced
very-long-instruction-word (VLIW) architecture developed by Texas Instruments (TI), making these DSPs an
excellent choice for multichannel and multifunctional applications.
With performance of up to 900 million floating-point operations per second (MFLOPS) at a clock rate of
150 MHz, the C6711/C6711B device offers cost-effective solutions to high-performance DSP programming
challenges. The C6711/C6711B DSP possesses the operational flexibility of high-speed controllers and the
numerical capability of array processors. This processor has 32 general-purpose registers of 32-bit word length
and eight highly independent functional units. The eight functional units provide four floating-/fixed-point ALUs,
two fixed-point ALUs, and two floating-/fixed-point multipliers. The C6711/C6711B can produce two MACs per
cycle for a total of 300 MMACS.
With performance of up to 1200 million floating-point operations per second (MFLOPS) at a clock rate of
200 MHz or 1350 MFLOPS at a clock rate of 250 MHz (for 6711D), the C6711C/C6711D device also offers
cost-effective solutions to high-performance DSP programming challenges. The C6711C/C6711D DSP also
possesses the operational flexibility of high-speed controllers and the numerical capability of array processors.
This processor has 32 general-purpose registers of 32-bit word length and eight highly independent functional
units. The eight functional units provide four floating-/fixed-point ALUs, two fixed-point ALUs, and two
floating-/fixed-point multipliers. The C6711C/C6711D can produce two MACs per cycle for a total of 400
MMACS.
The C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D DSPs also have application-specific hardware logic, on-chip memory,
and additional on-chip peripherals.
The C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D uses a two-level cache-based architecture and has a powerful and
diverse set of peripherals. The Level 1 program cache (L1P) is a 32-Kbit direct mapped cache and the Level
1 data cache (L1D) is a 32-Kbit 2-way set-associative cache. The Level 2 memory/cache (L2) consists of a
512-Kbit memory space that is shared between program and data space. L2 memory can be configured as
mapped memory, cache, or combinations of the two. The peripheral set includes two multichannel buffered
serial ports (McBSPs), two general-purpose timers, a host-port interface (HPI), and a glueless external memory
interface (EMIF) capable of interfacing to SDRAM, SBSRAM and asynchronous peripherals.
The C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D has a complete set of development tools which includes: a new C
compiler, an assembly optimizer to simplify programming and scheduling, and a Windows debugger interface
for visibility into source code execution.
TMS320C6000 is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
† Throughout the remainder of this document, the SM320C6711-EP, SM320C6711B-EP, SM320C6711C-EP, and SM320C6711D-EP shall be
referred to as 320C67x or C67x where generic, and where specific, their individual full device part numbers will be used or abbreviated as
C6711, C6711B, C6711C, C6711D, 11, 11B, 11C, or 11D, etc.
4
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
device characteristics
Table 1 provides an overview of the C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D DSPs. The table shows significant
features of each device, including the capacity of on-chip RAM, the peripherals, the execution time, and the
package type with pin count. For more details on the C6000 DSP device part numbers and part numbering,
see Table 18 and Figure 5.
Table 1. Characteristics of the C6711/C6711B and C6711C/C6711D Processors
INTERNAL CLOCK
SOURCE
HARDWARE FEATURES
C6711/C6711B
(FLOATING-POINT DSPs)
ECLKIN
EMIF
1
SYSCLK3 or ECLKIN
EDMA
HPI
1
CPU clock frequency
1
CPU/2 clock frequency
1
SYSCLK2
Peripherals
2
SYSCLK2
32-Bit Timers
GPIO Module
2
CPU/4 clock frequency
2
—
1/2 of SYSCLK2
—
2
SYSCLK2
—
1
72K
72K
Size (Bytes)
On-Chip Memory
4K-Byte (4KB) L1 Program (L1P) Cache
4KB L1 Data (L1D) Cache
64KB Unified Mapped RAM/Cache (L2)
Organization
CPU ID+
CPU Rev ID
Control Status Register (CSR.[31:16])
Frequency
MHz
Cycle Time
Voltage
1
1
CPU/2 clock frequency
McBSPs
C6711C/C6711D
(FLOATING-POINT DSPs)
ns
0x0202
150, 100
167, 200, 250
6.7 ns (C6711-150)
10 ns (C6711-100)
4 ns (C6711D-250)
5 ns (C6711D-200)
6 ns (C6711DGDPA-167)
6.7 ns (C6711B-150)
10 ns (C6711B-100)
10 ns (C6711BGFNA-100)
Core (V)
0x0203
1.9 (C6711-150)
1.8 (C6711B/C6711-100)
5 ns (C6711C-200)
6 ns (C6711CGDPA-167)
1.20‡ (C6711C/C6711D)
1.4 (C6711D-250)
3.3
3.3
I/O (V)
PLL Options
CLKIN frequency multiplier
Bypass (x1), x4
−
Clock Generator Options
Prescaler
Multiplier
Postscaler
—
/1, /2, /3, ..., /32
x4, x5, x6, ..., x25
/1, /2, /3, ..., /32
BGA Package
27 x 27 mm
256-Pin BGA (GFN)
272-Pin BGA (GDP)
Process Technology
µm
0.18 µm
0.13 µm
PP†
PP (C6711C)†
PD (C6711D)†
Product Status
Product Preview (PP)
Advance Information (AI)
Production Data (PD)
† PRODUCT PREVIEW information concerns products in the formative or design phase of development. Characteristic data and other
specifications are design goals. Texas Instruments reserves the right to change or discontinue these products without notice.
ADVANCE INFORMATION concerns new products in the sampling or preproduction phase of development. Characteristic data and
other specifications are subject to change without notice.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.
‡ These values are compatible with existing 1.26V designs.
C6000 is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
5
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
device compatibility
The 320C6211/C6211B and C6711/C6711B devices are pin-compatible and have the same peripheral set; thus,
making new system designs easier and providing faster time to market. The following list summarizes the device
characteristic differences among the C6211, C6211B, C6711, C6711B, C6711C, and C6711D devices:
D The C6211 and C6211B devices have a fixed-point C62x CPU, while the C6711, C6711B, C6711C, and
C6711D devices have a floating-point C67x CPU.
D The C6211/C6211B device runs at -167 and -150 MHz clock speeds (with a C6211BGFNA extended
temperature device that also runs at -150 MHz), while the C6711/C6711B device runs at -150 and -100 MHz
(with a C6711BGFNA extended temperature device that also runs at -100 MHz) and the C6711C/C6711D
device runs at -200 clock speed (with a C6711CGDPA and C6711DGDPA extended temperature devices
that also run at -167 MHz).
D The C6211/C6211B, C6711-100, and C6711B devices have a core voltage of 1.8 V, the C6711-150 device
core voltage is 1.9 V, and the C6711C and C6711D devices operate with a core voltage of 1.20† V.
D There are several enhancements and features that are only available on the C6711C/C6711D device, such
as: the CLKOUT3 signal, a software programmable PLL and PLL Controller, and a GPIO peripheral module.
The C6711D device also has additional enhancements such as: EMIF Big Endian mode correctness
EMIFBE and the L1D requestor priority to L2 bit [“P” bit] in the cache configuration (CCFG) register.
For more detailed discussion on the migration of a C6211, C6211B, C6711, C6711B device to a TMS320C6711C
device, see the Migrating from TMS320C6211B/6711B to TMS320C6711C application report (literature number
SPRA837).
For a more detailed discussion on the similarities/differences between the C6211 and C6711 devices, see the
How to Begin Development Today with the TMS320C6211 DSP and How to Begin Development with the
TMS320C6711 DSP application reports (literature number SPRA474 and SPRA522, respectively).
† This value is compatible with existing 1.26V designs.
6
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram
SBSRAM
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D Digital Signal Processors
SDRAM
32
SRAM
External
Memory
Interface
(EMIF)
ROM/FLASH
Timer 0
I/O Devices
Timer 1
Multichannel
Buffered
Serial Port 1
(McBSP1)
Framing Chips:
H.100, MVIP,
SCSA, T1, E1
AC97 Devices,
SPI Devices,
Codecs
Multichannel
Buffered
Serial Port 0
(McBSP0)
16
Host Port
Interface
(HPI)
Interrupt
Selector
GPIO§
Enhanced
DMA
Controller
(16 channel)
L2
Memory
4 Banks
64K Bytes
Total
PLL‡
L1P Cache
Direct Mapped
4K Bytes Total
C6000 CPU (DSP Core)
Instruction Fetch
Instruction Dispatch
Instruction Decode
Data Path A
A Register File
.L1† .S1† .M1† .D1
Data Path B
Control
Registers
Control
Logic
Test
B Register File
In-Circuit
Emulation
.D2 .M2† .S2† .L2†
Interrupt
Control
L1D Cache
2-Way Set
Associative
4K Bytes Total
Power-Down
Logic
Boot
Configuration
† In addition to fixed-point instructions, these functional units execute floating-point instructions.
‡ The C6711C/C6711D device has a software-configurable PLL (with x4 through x25 multiplier and /1 through /32 divider) and a PLL
Controller which is different from the hardware PLL peripheral on the C6711 and C6711B devices.
§ Applicable to the C6711C/C6711D device only
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
7
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
CPU (DSP core) description
The CPU fetches advanced very-long instruction words (VLIW) (256 bits wide) to supply up to eight 32-bit
instructions to the eight functional units during every clock cycle. The VLIW architecture features controls by
which all eight units do not have to be supplied with instructions if they are not ready to execute. The first bit
of every 32-bit instruction determines if the next instruction belongs to the same execute packet as the previous
instruction, or whether it should be executed in the following clock as a part of the next execute packet. Fetch
packets are always 256 bits wide; however, the execute packets can vary in size. The variable-length execute
packets are a key memory-saving feature, distinguishing the C67x CPU from other VLIW architectures.
The CPU features two sets of functional units. Each set contains four units and a register file. One set contains
functional units .L1, .S1, .M1, and .D1; the other set contains units .D2, .M2, .S2, and .L2. The two register files
each contain 16 32-bit registers for a total of 32 general-purpose registers. The two sets of functional units, along
with two register files, compose sides A and B of the CPU (see the functional block and CPU diagram and
Figure 1). The four functional units on each side of the CPU can freely share the 16 registers belonging to that
side. Additionally, each side features a single data bus connected to all the registers on the other side, by which
the two sets of functional units can access data from the register files on the opposite side. While register access
by functional units on the same side of the CPU as the register file can service all the units in a single clock cycle,
register access using the register file across the CPU supports one read and one write per cycle.
The C67x CPU executes all C62x instructions. In addition to C62x fixed-point instructions, the six out of eight
functional units (.L1, .S1, .M1, .M2, .S2, and .L2) also execute floating-point instructions. The remaining two
functional units (.D1 and .D2) also execute the new LDDW instruction which loads 64 bits per CPU side for a
total of 128 bits per cycle.
Another key feature of the C67x CPU is the load/store architecture, where all instructions operate on registers
(as opposed to data in memory). Two sets of data-addressing units (.D1 and .D2) are responsible for all data
transfers between the register files and the memory. The data address driven by the .D units allows data
addresses generated from one register file to be used to load or store data to or from the other register file. The
C67x CPU supports a variety of indirect addressing modes using either linear- or circular-addressing modes
with 5- or 15-bit offsets. All instructions are conditional, and most can access any one of the 32 registers. Some
registers, however, are singled out to support specific addressing or to hold the condition for conditional
instructions (if the condition is not automatically “true”). The two .M functional units are dedicated for multiplies.
The two .S and .L functional units perform a general set of arithmetic, logical, and branch functions with results
available every clock cycle.
The processing flow begins when a 256-bit-wide instruction fetch packet is fetched from a program memory.
The 32-bit instructions destined for the individual functional units are “linked” together by “1” bits in the least
significant bit (LSB) position of the instructions. The instructions that are “chained” together for simultaneous
execution (up to eight in total) compose an execute packet. A “0” in the LSB of an instruction breaks the chain,
effectively placing the instructions that follow it in the next execute packet. If an execute packet crosses the
fetch-packet boundary (256 bits wide), the assembler places it in the next fetch packet, while the remainder of
the current fetch packet is padded with NOP instructions. The number of execute packets within a fetch packet
can vary from one to eight. Execute packets are dispatched to their respective functional units at the rate of one
per clock cycle and the next 256-bit fetch packet is not fetched until all the execute packets from the current fetch
packet have been dispatched. After decoding, the instructions simultaneously drive all active functional units
for a maximum execution rate of eight instructions every clock cycle. While most results are stored in 32-bit
registers, they can be subsequently moved to memory as bytes or half-words as well. All load and store
instructions are byte-, half-word, or word-addressable.
8
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
CPU (DSP core) description (continued)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
src1
.L1† src2
dst
long dst
long src
LD1 32 MSB
ST1
long src
long dst
dst
.S1†
src1
Data Path A
8
8
32
32
8
8
Á
Á
Á
Á
src2
dst
src1
†
.M1
src2
LD1 32 LSB
DA1
DA2
LD2 32 LSB
Á
Á
Á
Á
.D1
.D2
dst
src1
src2
src2
src2
.S2†
LD2 32 MSB
ST2
Á
Á
long src
long dst
dst
.L2†
src2
src1
Register
File A
(A0−A15)
1X
.M2† src1
dst
Data Path B
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
2X
src2
src1
dst
src1
dst
long dst
long src
Á
Á
Á
Á
8
Á
Á
Á
Á
Register
File B
(B0−B15)
8
32
32
8
Á
Á
Á
Á
8
† In addition to fixed-point instructions, these functional units execute floating-point instructions.
Control
Register File
Figure 1. 320C67x CPU (DSP Core) Data Paths
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
9
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
memory map summary
Table 2 shows the memory map address ranges of the C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D devices. Internal
memory is always located at address 0 and can be used as both program and data memory. The
C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D configuration registers for the common peripherals are located at the same
hex address ranges. The external memory address ranges in the C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D devices
begin at the address location 0x8000 0000.
Table 2. 320C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D Memory Map Summary
MEMORY BLOCK DESCRIPTION
BLOCK SIZE (BYTES)
Internal RAM (L2)
64K
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
0000 0000 – 0000 FFFF
Reserved
24M – 64K
0001 0000 – 017F FFFF
External Memory Interface (EMIF) Registers
256K
0180 0000 – 0183 FFFF
L2 Registers
256K
0184 0000 – 0187 FFFF
HPI Registers
256K
0188 0000 – 018B FFFF
McBSP 0 Registers
256K
018C 0000 – 018F FFFF
McBSP 1 Registers
256K
0190 0000 – 0193 FFFF
Timer 0 Registers
256K
0194 0000 – 0197 FFFF
Timer 1 Registers
256K
0198 0000 – 019B FFFF
019C 0000 – 019C 01FF
Interrupt Selector Registers
512
Device Configuration Registers [C6711C/C6711D only]
4
019C 0200 – 019C 0203
Reserved
256K − 516
019C 0204 – 019F FFFF
EDMA RAM and EDMA Registers
256K
01A0 0000 – 01A3 FFFF
01A4 0000 – 01AF FFFF
Reserved
768K
GPIO Registers [C6711C/C6711D only]
16K
01B0 0000 – 01B0 3FFF
Reserved
480K
01B0 4000 – 01B7 BFFF
PLL Controller Registers [C6711C/C6711D only]
8K
01B7 C000 – 01B7 DFFF
Reserved
4M + 520K
01B7 E000 – 01FF FFFF
QDMA Registers
52
0200 0000 – 0200 0033
Reserved
736M – 52
0200 0034 – 2FFF FFFF
McBSP 0 Data/Peripheral Data Bus
64M
3000 0000 – 33FF FFFF
McBSP 1 Data/Peripheral Data Bus
64M
3400 0000 – 37FF FFFF
Reserved
64M
3800 0000 – 3BFF FFFF
Reserved
EMIF CE0†
EMIF CE1†
1G + 64M
3C00 0000 – 7FFF FFFF
256M
8000 0000 – 8FFF FFFF
256M
9000 0000 – 9FFF FFFF
EMIF CE2†
EMIF CE3†
256M
A000 0000 – AFFF FFFF
256M
B000 0000 – BFFF FFFF
Reserved
1G
C000 0000 – FFFF FFFF
† The number of EMIF address pins (EA[21:2]) limits the maximum addressable memory (SDRAM) to 128MB per CE space. To get 256MB of
addressable memory, additional general-purpose output pin or external logic is required.
10
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
peripheral register descriptions
Table 3 through Table 14 identify the peripheral registers for the C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D devices by
their register names, acronyms, and hex address or hex address range. For more detailed information on the
register contents, bit names, and their descriptions, see the specific peripheral reference guide listed in the
TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).
Table 3. EMIF Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0180 0000
GBLCTL
EMIF global control
REGISTER NAME
0180 0004
CECTL1
EMIF CE1 space control
0180 0008
CECTL0
EMIF CE0 space control
0180 000C
−
0180 0010
CECTL2
Reserved
EMIF CE2 space control
0180 0014
CECTL3
EMIF CE3 space control
0180 0018
SDCTL
EMIF SDRAM control
0180 001C
SDTIM
EMIF SDRAM refresh control
0180 0020
SDEXT
EMIF SDRAM extension
0180 0024 − 0183 FFFF
−
Reserved
Table 4. L2 Cache Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0184 0000
CCFG
REGISTER NAME
0184 4000
L2WBAR
L2 writeback base address register
0184 4004
L2WWC
L2 writeback word count register
0184 4010
L2WIBAR
L2 writeback-invalidate base address register
0184 4014
L2WIWC
L2 writeback-invalidate word count register
0184 4020
L1PIBAR
L1P invalidate base address register
0184 4024
L1PIWC
L1P invalidate word count register
0184 4030
L1DWIBAR
L1D writeback-invalidate base address register
0184 4034
L1DWIWC
L1D writeback-invalidate word count register
0184 5000
L2WB
0184 5004
L2WBINV
0184 8200
MAR0
Controls CE0 range 8000 0000 − 80FF FFFF
0184 8204
MAR1
Controls CE0 range 8100 0000 − 81FF FFFF
0184 8208
MAR2
Controls CE0 range 8200 0000 − 82FF FFFF
0184 820C
MAR3
Controls CE0 range 8300 0000 − 83FF FFFF
0184 8240
MAR4
Controls CE1 range 9000 0000 − 90FF FFFF
0184 8244
MAR5
Controls CE1 range 9100 0000 − 91FF FFFF
0184 8248
MAR6
Controls CE1 range 9200 0000 − 92FF FFFF
0184 824C
MAR7
Controls CE1 range 9300 0000 − 93FF FFFF
0184 8280
MAR8
Controls CE2 range A000 0000 − A0FF FFFF
0184 8284
MAR9
Controls CE2 range A100 0000 − A1FF FFFF
0184 8288
MAR10
Controls CE2 range A200 0000 − A2FF FFFF
0184 828C
MAR11
Controls CE2 range A300 0000 − A3FF FFFF
0184 82C0
MAR12
Controls CE3 range B000 0000 − B0FF FFFF
0184 82C4
MAR13
Controls CE3 range B100 0000 − B1FF FFFF
0184 82C8
MAR14
Controls CE3 range B200 0000 − B2FF FFFF
0184 82CC
MAR15
Controls CE3 range B300 0000 − B3FF FFFF
0184 82D0 − 0187 FFFF
−
Cache configuration register
L2 writeback all register
L2 writeback-invalidate all register
Reserved
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
11
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 5. Interrupt Selector Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
019C 0000
MUXH
Interrupt multiplexer high
Selects which interrupts drive CPU interrupts 10−15
(INT10−INT15)
019C 0004
MUXL
Interrupt multiplexer low
Selects which interrupts drive CPU interrupts 4−9
(INT04−INT09)
019C 0008
EXTPOL
External interrupt polarity
Sets the polarity of the external interrupts
(EXT_INT4−EXT_INT7)
019C 000C − 019F FFFF
−
Reserved
Table 6. Device Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
019C 0200
DEVCFG
019C 0204 − 019F FFFF
−
N/A
CSR
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
This C6711C/C6711D-only register allows the user
control of the EMIF input clock source. For more
detailed information on the device configuration
register, see the Device Configurations section of this
data sheet.
Device Configuration
Reserved
CPU Control Status Register
Identifies which CPU and defines the silicon revision of
the CPU. This register also offers the user control of
device operation.
For more detailed information on the CPU Control
Status Register, see the CPU CSR Register
Description section of this data sheet.
Table 7. EDMA Parameter RAM†
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01A0 0000 − 01A0 0017
−
Parameters for Event 0 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
REGISTER NAME
01A0 0018 − 01A0 002F
−
Parameters for Event 1 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0030 − 01A0 0047
−
Parameters for Event 2 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0048 − 01A0 005F
−
Parameters for Event 3 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0060 − 01A0 0077
−
Parameters for Event 4 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0078 − 01A0 008F
−
Parameters for Event 5 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0090 − 01A0 00A7
−
Parameters for Event 6 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 00A8 − 01A0 00BF
−
Parameters for Event 7 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 00C0 − 01A0 00D7
−
Parameters for Event 8 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 00D8 − 01A0 00EF
−
Parameters for Event 9 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 00F0 − 01A0 00107
−
Parameters for Event 10 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0108 − 01A0 011F
−
Parameters for Event 11 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0120 − 01A0 0137
−
Parameters for Event 12 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0138 − 01A0 014F
−
Parameters for Event 13 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0150 − 01A0 0167
−
Parameters for Event 14 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0168 − 01A0 017F
−
Parameters for Event 15 (6 words) or Reload/Link Parameters for other Event
01A0 0180 − 01A0 0197
−
Reload/link parameters for Event 0−15
01A0 0198 − 01A0 01AF
−
Reload/link parameters for Event 0−15
...
...
01A0 07E0 − 01A0 07F7
−
01A0 07F8 − 01A0 07FF
−
Reload/link parameters for Event 0−15
Scratch pad area (2 words)
† The C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D device has 85 EDMA parameters total: 16 Event/Reload parameters and 69 Reload-only parameters.
12
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
For more details on the EDMA parameter RAM 6-word parameter entry structure, see Figure 2.
31
0
EDMA Parameter
Word 0
EDMA Channel Options Parameter (OPT)
OPT
Word 1
EDMA Channel Source Address (SRC)
SRC
Word 2
Array/Frame Count (FRMCNT)
Word 3
Element Count (ELECNT)
EDMA Channel Destination Address (DST)
CNT
DST
Word 4
Array/Frame Index (FRMIDX)
Element Index (ELEIDX)
IDX
Word 5
Element Count Reload (ELERLD)
Link Address (LINK)
RLD
Figure 2. EDMA Channel Parameter Entries (6 Words) for Each EDMA Event
Table 8. EDMA Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01A0 0800 − 01A0 FEFC
−
REGISTER NAME
01A0 FF00
ESEL0
EDMA event selector 0 [C6711C/C6711D Only]
01A0 FF04
ESEL1
EDMA event selector 1 [C6711C/C6711D Only]
01A0 FF08 − 01A0 FF0B
−
01A0 FF0C
ESEL3
01A0 FF1F − 01A0 FFDC
−
01A0 FFE0
PQSR
Priority queue status register
01A0 FFE4
CIPR
Channel interrupt pending register
01A0 FFE8
CIER
Channel interrupt enable register
01A0 FFEC
CCER
Channel chain enable register
01A0 FFF0
ER
01A0 FFF4
EER
Event enable register
01A0 FFF8
ECR
Event clear register
01A0 FFFC
ESR
Event set register
01A1 0000 − 01A3 FFFF
–
Reserved
Reserved
EDMA event selector 3 [C6711C/C6711D Only]
Reserved
Event register
Reserved
Table 9. Quick DMA (QDMA) and Pseudo Registers†
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0200 0000
QOPT
QDMA options parameter register
REGISTER NAME
0200 0004
QSRC
QDMA source address register
0200 0008
QCNT
QDMA frame count register
0200 000C
QDST
QDMA destination address register
0200 0010
QIDX
QDMA index register
0200 0014 − 0200 001C
−
0200 0020
QSOPT
QDMA pseudo options register
0200 0024
QSSRC
QDMA pseudo source address register
0200 0028
QSCNT
QDMA pseudo frame count register
0200 002C
QSDST
QDMA pseudo destination address register
0200 0030
QSIDX
Reserved
QDMA pseudo index register
† All the QDMA and Pseudo registers are write-accessible only
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
13
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 10. PLL Controller Registers [C6711C/C6711D Only]
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01B7 C000
PLLPID
Peripheral identification register (PID)
01B7 C004 − 01B7 C0FF
−
01B7 C100
PLLCSR
01B7 C104 − 01B7 C10F
−
01B7 C110
PLLM
01B7 C114
PLLDIV0
PLL controller divider 0 register
01B7 C118
PLLDIV1
PLL controller divider 1 register
01B7 C11C
PLLDIV2
PLL controller divider 2 register
01B7 C120
PLLDIV3
PLL controller divider 3 register
01B7 C124
OSCDIV1
Oscillator divider 1 register
01B7 C128 − 01B7 DFFF
−
[C6711D value: 0x00010801 for PLL Controller]
[C6711C value: 0x00010801 for PLL Controller]
Reserved
PLL control/status register
Reserved
PLL multiplier control register
Reserved
Table 11. GPIO Registers [C6711C/C6711D Only]
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01B0 0000
GPEN
GPIO enable register
REGISTER NAME
01B0 0004
GPDIR
GPIO direction register
GPIO value register
01B0 0008
GPVAL
01B0 000C
−
01B0 0010
GPDH
GPIO delta high register
01B0 0014
GPHM
GPIO high mask register
01B0 0018
GPDL
GPIO delta low register
01B0 001C
GPLM
GPIO low mask register
01B0 0020
GPGC
GPIO global control register
01B0 0024
GPPOL
GPIO interrupt polarity register
01B0 0028 − 01B0 3FFF
−
Reserved
Reserved
Table 12. HPI Registers
14
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
−
HPID
HPI data register
REGISTER NAME
Host read/write access only
COMMENTS
−
HPIA
HPI address register
Host read/write access only
0188 0000
HPIC
HPI control register
Both Host/CPU read/write access
0188 0001 − 018B FFFF
−
Reserved
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 13. Timer 0 and Timer 1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
TIMER 0
TIMER 1
0194 0000
0198 0000
ACRONYM
CTLx
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
Timer x control register
Determines the operating
mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status, and controls the
function of the TOUT pin.
0194 0004
0198 0004
PRDx
Timer x period register
Contains the number of timer
input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the
TSTAT signal frequency.
0194 0008
0198 0008
CNTx
Timer x counter register
Contains the current value of
the incrementing counter.
0194 000C − 0197 FFFF
0198 000C − 019B FFFF
−
Reserved
−
Table 14. McBSP0 and McBSP1 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
McBSP0
McBSP1
ACRONYM
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
McBSPx data receive register via Configuration Bus
018C 0000
0190 0000
DRRx
3000 0000 − 33FF FFFF
3400 0000 − 37FF FFFF
DRRx
McBSPx data receive register via Peripheral Data Bus
018C 0004
0190 0004
DXRx
McBSPx data transmit register via Configuration Bus
3000 0000 − 33FF FFFF
3400 0000 − 37FF FFFF
DXRx
McBSPx data transmit register via Peripheral Data Bus
The CPU and EDMA controller can only read this register;
they cannot write to it.
018C 0008
0190 0008
SPCRx
018C 000C
0190 000C
RCRx
McBSPx receive control register
018C 0010
0190 0010
XCRx
McBSPx transmit control register
018C 0014
0190 0014
SRGRx
018C 0018
0190 0018
MCRx
McBSPx multichannel control register
018C 001C
0190 001C
RCERx
McBSPx receive channel enable register
018C 0020
0190 0020
XCERx
McBSPx transmit channel enable register
018C 0024
0190 0024
PCRx
018C 0028 − 018F FFFF
0190 0028 − 0193 FFFF
−
•
McBSPx serial port control register
McBSPx sample rate generator register
McBSPx pin control register
Reserved
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
15
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
signal groups description
CLKIN
CLKOUT3†
CLKOUT2‡
CLKOUT1§
CLKMODE0
PLLV¶
PLLG¶
PLLF¶
PLLHV†
Reset and
Interrupts
Clock/PLL
TMS
TDO
TDI
TCK
TRST
EMU0
EMU1
EMU2
EMU3
EMU4
EMU5
RESET
NMI
EXT_INT7#
EXT_INT6#
EXT_INT5#
EXT_INT4#
RSV
RSV
RSV
IEEE Standard
1149.1
(JTAG)
Emulation
Reserved
•
•
•
RSV
RSV
RSV
Control/Status
HD[15:0]
HCNTL0
HCNTL1
HPI
(Host-Port Interface)
16
Data
Register Select
Control
HHWIL
Half-Word
Select
HAS
HR/W
HCS
HDS1
HDS2
HRDY
HINT
† The CLKOUT3 and PLLHV pin functions are applicable to the C6711C/C6711D device only.
‡ For the C6711C/C6711D device, the CLKOUT2 pin is multiplexed with the GP[2] pin. Default function is CLKOUT2. To use this
pin as GPIO, the GP2EN bit in the GPEN register and the GP2DIR bit in the GPDIR register must be properly configured.
§ The CLKOUT1 pin function is applicable to the C6711/C6711B devices only.
¶ These pins apply to the C6711/C6711B devices only. The C6711C/C6711D device has a different PLL module and PLL
Controller; therefore, the PLLV, PLLG, and PLLF pins are not necessary on the C6711C/C6711D device.
# For the C6711C/C6711D device, the external interrupts (EXT_INT[7−4]) go through the general-purpose input/output (GPIO)
module. When used as interrupt inputs, the GP[7−4] pins must be configured as inputs (via the GPDIR register) and enabled
(via the GPEN register) in addition to enabling the interrupts in the interrupt enable register (IER).
Figure 3. CPU (DSP Core) and Peripheral Signals
16
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
signal groups description (continued)
32
ED[31:0]
Data
Memory
Control
CE3
CE2
CE1
CE0
EA[21:2]
BE3
BE2
BE1
BE0
TOUT1
Memory Map
Space Select
20
Address
Bus
Arbitration
ECLKIN
ECLKOUT
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
AWE/SDWE/SSWE
ARDY
HOLD
HOLDA
BUSREQ
Byte Enables
EMIF
(External Memory Interface)
Timer 1
Timer 0
TOUT0
TINP0
TINP1
Timers
McBSP1
McBSP0
CLKX1
FSX1
DX1
Transmit
Transmit
CLKX0
FSX0
DX0
CLKR1
FSR1
DR1†
Receive
Receive
CLKR0
FSR0
DR0
CLKS1†
Clock
Clock
CLKS0
McBSPs
(Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports)
† For proper C6711C/C6711D device operation, these pins must be externally pulled up with a 10-kΩ resistor.
Figure 4. Peripheral Signals
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
17
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
signal groups description (continued)
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
GP[6](EXT_INT6)
GP[5](EXT_INT5)
GP[4](EXT_INT4)
GPIO†
CLKOUT2/GP[2]
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Port
† Only the C6711C/C6711D device supports the general-purpose input/output (GPIO) port peripheral.
Figure 4. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
18
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS
On the C6711/11B and C6711C/C6711D devices, bootmode and certain device configurations/peripheral
selections are determined at device reset. For the C6711C/C6711D device only, other device configurations
(e.g., EMIF input clock source) are software-configurable via the device configurations register (DEVCFG)
[address location 0x019C0200] after device reset.
device configurations at device reset
Table 15 describes the C6711/11B/11C/11D device configuration pins, which are set up via internal or external
pullup/pulldown resistors through the HPI data pins (HD[4:3], HD8, HD12 [11D only]) and CLKMODE0 pin.
These configuration pins must be in the desired state until reset is released. For more details on these device
configuration pins, see the Terminal Functions table of this data sheet.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
19
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Table 15. Device Configurations Pins at Device Reset (HD[4:3], HD8, HD12 [11D only], and CLKMODE0)†
CONFIGURATION
PIN
GFN and GDP
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
EMIF Big Endian mode correctness (EMIFBE) [C6711D only]
HD12
C15
0 – The EMIF data will always be presented on the ED[7:0] side of the bus, regardless of
the endianess mode (Little/Big Endian).
1 − In Little Endian mode (HD8 =1), the 8-bit or 16-bit EMIF data will be present on the
ED[7:0] side of the bus.
In Big Endian mode (HD8 =0), the 8-bit or 16-bit EMIF data will be present on the
ED[31:24] side of the bus [default].
This enhancement is not supported on the C6711/11B/11C device.
For proper C6711/11B/11C device operation, do not oppose the internal pullup (IPU) resistor
on this pin.
This new functionality does not affect systems using the current default value of HD12=1. For
more detailed information on the big endian mode correctness, see the EMIF Big Endian Mode
Correctness [C6711D Only] portion of this data sheet.
HD8
HD[4:3]
(BOOTMODE)
B17
C19, C20
Device Endian mode (LEND)
0 – System operates in Big Endian mode
1 − System operates in Little Endian mode (default)
Bootmode Configuration Pins (BOOTMODE)
00 – CE1 width 32-bit, HPI boot/Emulation boot
01 – CE1 width 8-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default
timings (default mode)
10 − CE1 width 16-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default
timings
11 − CE1 width 32-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default
timings
For more detailed information on these bootmode configurations, see the bootmode section of
this data sheet.
For the C6711 and C6711B devices, clock mode select
0 − Bypass mode (x1). CPU clock = CLKIN
1 − PLL mode (x4). CPU clock = 4 x CLKIN [default]
CLKMODE0
C4
For the C6711C and C6711D devices, clock generator input clock source select
0 – Reserved. Do not use.
1 − CLKIN square wave [default]
For proper C6711C/C6711D device operation, this pin must be either left unconnected or
externally pulled up with a 1-kΩ resistor.
† All other HD pins [HD [15:9, 7:5, 2:0] (for 11/11B/11C) or HD [15:13, 11:9, 7:5, 2:0] (for 11D)] have pullups/pulldowns (IPUs or IPDs). For proper
device operation of the HD [15:9, 7, 1, 0] (for 11/11B/11C) or HD [14, 13, 11:9, 7, 1, 0] (for 11D), do not oppose these pins with external
pullups/pulldowns at reset; however, the HD[6, 5, 2] (for 11/11B/11C) or HD[15, 6, 5, 2] (for 11D) pins can be opposed and driven during reset.
20
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
DEVCFG register description [C6711C/C6711D only]
The device configuration register (DEVCFG) allows the user control of the EMIF input clock source for the
C6711C/C6711D device only. For more detailed information on the DEVCFG register control bits, see Table 16
and Table 17.
Table 16. Device Configuration Register (DEVCFG) [Address location: 0x019C0200 − 0x019C02FF]
31
16
Reserved†
RW-0
5
15
4
3
0
Reserved†
EKSRC
Reserved†
RW-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
Legend: R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
† Do not write non-zero values to these bit locations.
Table 17. Device Configuration (DEVCFG) Register Selection Bit Descriptions
BIT #
NAME
31:5
Reserved
4
EKSRC
3:0
Reserved
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Do not write non-zero values to these bit locations.
EMIF input clock source bit.
Determines which clock signal is used as the EMIF input clock.
0 = SYSCLK3 (from the clock generator) is the EMIF input clock source (default)
1 = ECLKIN external pin is the EMIF input clock source
Reserved. Do not write non-zero values to these bit locations.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
21
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
TERMINAL FUNCTIONS
The terminal functions table identifies the external signal names, the associated pin (ball) numbers along with
the mechanical package designator, the pin type (I, O/Z, or I/O/Z), whether the pin has any internal
pullup/pulldown resistors and a functional pin description. For more detailed information on device
configuration, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
22
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
CLOCK/PLL
CLKIN
CLKOUT1
A3
D7
A3
—
I
O
IPD
Clock Input
IPD
Clock output at device speed [C6711/11B only]
The CLK1EN bit in the EMIF GBLCTL register controls the CLKOUT1 pin.
CLK1EN = 0:
CLKOUT1 is disabled
CLK1EN = 1:
CLKOUT1 enabled to clock [default]
Clock output at half of device speed [C6711/11B only]
CLKOUT2
(/GP0[2])
Y12
Y12
O/Z
IPD
For the C6711C/11D devices, the CLKOUT2 pin is multiplexed with the GP[2] pin.
Clock output at half of device speed (O/Z) [default] (SYSCLK2 internal signal from the
clock generator) or this pin can be programmed as GP[2] (I/O/Z).
When the CLKOUT2 pin is enabled, the CLK2EN bit in the EMIF global control
register (GBLCTL) controls the CLKOUT2 pin (All devices).
CLK2EN = 0:
CLKOUT2 is disabled
CLK2EN = 1:
CLKOUT2 enabled to clock [default]
CLKOUT3
—
D10
O
IPD
Clock output programmable by OSCDIV1 register in the PLL controller. [11C/11D]
Clock mode select [C6711/11B]
0
−
Bypass mode (x1). CPU clock = CLKIN
1
−
PLL mode (x4). CPU clock = 4 x CLKIN [default]
CLKMODE0
C4
C4
I
IPU
Clock generator input clock source select [C6711C/C6711D]
0
−
Reserved. Do not use.
1
−
CLKIN square wave [default]
For proper C6711C/11D device operation, this pin must be either left unconnected or
externally pulled up with a 1-kΩ resistor.
PLLV§
PLLG§
A4
—
PLL analog VCC connection for the low-pass filter [C6711/11B only]
C6
—
A¶
A¶
PLLF
B5
—
A¶
PLL low-pass filter connection to external components and a bypass capacitor
[C6711/11B only]
PLLHV
—
C5
A¶
Analog power (3.3 V) for PLL [C6711C/C6711D only]
TMS
B7
B7
I
IPU
JTAG test-port mode select
TDO
A8
A8
O/Z
IPU
JTAG test-port data out
TDI
A7
A7
I
IPU
JTAG test-port data in
TCK
A6
A6
I
IPU
JTAG test-port clock
TRST
B6
B6
I
IPD
JTAG test-port reset. For IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility, see the IEEE 1149.1
JTAG Compatibility Statement section of this data sheet.
EMU5
B12
B12
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 5. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU4
C11
C11
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 4. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU3
B10
B10
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 3. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
PLL analog GND connection for the low-pass filter [C6711/11B only]
JTAG EMULATION
EMU2
D10
D3
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 2. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ For C6711/11B, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal
to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
For C6711C/11D, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 13-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPD
or 18-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPU. An external pullup or pulldown resistor no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively, should be
used to pull a signal to the opposite supply rail.]
§ PLLV and PLLG are not part of external voltage supply or ground. See the CLOCK/PLL documentation for information on how to connect these
pins [C6711/11B only].
¶ A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
23
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
JTAG EMULATION (CONTINUED)
Emulation [1:0] pins [C6711/C6711B].
For the C6711/C6711B devices, the EMU0 and EMU1 pins are internally pulled up
with 30-kΩ resistors. For Emulation and normal operation, no external pullup/pulldown resistors are necessary. However for the Boundary Scan operation, pull down
the EMU1 and EMU0 pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ resistor.
EMU1
EMU0
B9
D9
B9
D9
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation [1:0] pins [C6711C/C6711D].
• Select the device functional mode of operation
Operation
EMU[1:0]
00
Boundary Scan/Functional Mode (see Note)
01
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Emulation/Functional Mode [default] (see the IEEE 1149.1
JTAG Compatibility Statement section of this data sheet)
The DSP can be placed in Functional mode when the EMU[1:0] pins are
configured for either Boundary Scan or Emulation.
Note: When the EMU[1:0] pins are configured for Boundary Scan mode, the
internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST signal must not be opposed in order to
operate in Functional mode.
For the Boundary Scan mode drive EMU[1:0] and RESET pins low [C6711C/11D].
RESETS AND INTERRUPTS
RESET
A13
A13
I
IPU
Device reset. When using Boundary Scan mode on the C6711C/C6711D device,
drive the EMU[1:0] and RESET pins low.
For the C6711D device, this pin does not have an IPU.”
NMI
C13
C13
I
IPD
Nonmaskable interrupt
• Edge-driven (rising edge)
Any noise on the NMI pin may trigger an NMI interrupt; therefore, if the NMI pin is not
used, it is recommended that the NMI pin be grounded versus relying on the IPD.
EXT_INT7
E3
E3
EXT_INT6
D2
D2
EXT_INT5
C1
C1
EXT_INT4
C2
C2
HINT
J20
HCNTL1
External interrupts [C6711/11B]
• Edge-driven
• Polarity independently selected via the External Interrupt Polarity Register bits
(EXTPOL.[3:0])
I
IPU
J20
O
IPU
Host interrupt (from DSP to host)
G19
G19
I
IPU
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers
HCNTL0
G18
G18
I
IPU
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers
HHWIL
H20
H20
I
IPU
Host half-word select − first or second half-word (not necessarily high or low order)
General-purpose input/output pins (I/O/Z) which also function as external
interrupts [C6711C/C6711D only]
• Edge-driven
• Polarity independently selected via the External Interrupt Polarity Register
bits (EXTPOL.[3:0]), in addition to the GPIO registers.
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI)
HR/W
G20
G20
I
IPU
Host read or write select
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ For C6711/11B, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal
to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
For C6711C/11D, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 13-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPD
or 18-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPU. An external pullup or pulldown resistor no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively, should be
used to pull a signal to the opposite supply rail.]
24
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) (CONTINUED)
Host-port data
• Used for transfer of data, address, and control
• Also controls initialization of DSP modes at reset via pullup/pulldown resistors
− Device Endian mode (HD8)
0 –
Big Endian
1 −
Little Endian
HD15
B14
B14
IPU
HD14
C14
C14
IPU
HD13
A15
A15
IPU
HD12
C15
C15
IPU
HD11
A16
A16
IPU
HD10
B16
B16
IPU
HD9
C16
C16
IPU
HD8
B17
B17
IPU
HD7
A18
A18
IPU
HD6
C17
C17
IPU
HD5
B18
B18
IPU
HD4
C19
C19
IPD
HD3
C20
C20
IPU
HD2
D18
D18
IPU
HD1
D20
D20
IPU
HD0
E20
E20
IPU
Other HD pins [HD [15:9, 7:5, 2:0] (for 11/11B/11C) or HD [15:13, 11:9, 7:5, 2:0] (for
11D)] have pullups/pulldowns (IPUs/IPDs). For proper device operation of the
HD[15:9, 7, 1, 0] for 11/11B/11C or HD[14, 13, 11:9, 7, 1, 0] for 11D, do not oppose
these pins with external IPUs/IPDs at reset; however, the HD[6, 5, 2] for 11/11B/11C
or HD[15, 6, 5, 2] for 11D pins can be opposed and driven during reset. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
HAS
E18
E18
I
IPU
Host address strobe
HCS
F20
F20
I
IPU
Host chip select
HDS1
E19
E19
I
IPU
Host data strobe 1
HDS2
F18
F18
I
IPU
Host data strobe 2
I/O/Z
EMIF Big Endian mode correctness (EMIFBE) (HD12) [C6711D only]
0 –
The EMIF data will always be presented on the ED[7:0] side of the bus,
regardless of the endianess mode (Little/Big Endian).
1 −
In Little Endian mode (HD8 =1), the 8-bit or 16-bit EMIF data will be
present on the ED[7:0] side of the bus.
In Big Endian mode (HD8 =0), the 8-bit or 16-bit EMIF data will be present
on the ED[31:24] side of the bus [default].
This enhancement is not supported on the C6711/11B/11C device.
For proper C6711/11B/11C device operation, do not oppose the internal pullup (IPU)
resistor on this pin.
This new functionality does not affect systems using the current default value of
HD12=1. For more detailed information on the big endian mode correctness, see the
EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness [C6711D Only] portion of this data sheet.
− Boot mode (HD[4:3])
00 –
CE1 width 32-bit, HPI boot/Emulation boot
01 −
CE1 width 8-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default timings
(default mode)
10 −
CE1 width 16-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default timings
11 −
CE1 width 32-bit, Asynchronous external ROM boot with default timings
HRDY
H19
H19
O
IPD
Host ready (from DSP to host)
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ For C6711/11B, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal
to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
For C6711C/11D, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 13-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPD
or 18-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPU. An external pullup or pulldown resistor no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively, should be
used to pull a signal to the opposite supply rail.]
# To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
25
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIF − CONTROL SIGNALS COMMON TO ALL TYPES OF MEMORY#
CE3
V6
V6
O/Z
IPU
CE2
W6
W6
O/Z
IPU
CE1
W18
W18
O/Z
IPU
CE0
V17
V17
O/Z
IPU
BE3
V5
V5
O/Z
IPU
BE2
Y4
Y4
O/Z
IPU
BE1
U19
U19
O/Z
IPU
BE0
V20
V20
O/Z
IPU
Memory space enables
• Enabled by bits 28 through 31 of the word address
• Only one asserted during any external data access
Byte-enable control
• Decoded from the two lowest bits of the internal address
• Byte-write enables for most types of memory
• Can be directly connected to SDRAM read and write mask signal (SDQM)
EMIF − BUS ARBITRATION#
HOLDA
J18
J18
O
IPU
Hold-request-acknowledge to the host
HOLD
J17
J17
I
IPU
Hold request from the host
BUSREQ
J19
J19
O
IPU
Bus request output
EMIF − ASYNCHRONOUS/SYNCHRONOUS MEMORY CONTROL#
ECLKIN
Y11
Y11
I
IPD
External EMIF input clock source
EMIF output clock (based on ECLKIN) [C6711/11B]
ECLKOUT
Y10
Y10
O/Z
IPD
EMIF output clock depends on the EKSRC bit (DEVCFG.[4]) and on EKEN bit
(GBLCTL.[5]). [C6711C/C6711D only]
EKSRC = 0 – ECLKOUT is based on the internal SYSCLK3 signal
from the clock generator (default).
EKSRC = 1 – ECLKOUT is based on the the external EMIF input clock
source pin (ECLKIN)
EKEN = 0
EKEN = 1
– ECLKOUT held low
– ECLKOUT enabled to clock (default)
ARE/SDCAS/
SSADS
V11
V11
O/Z
IPU
Asynchronous memory read enable/SDRAM column-address strobe/SBSRAM address strobe
AOE/SDRAS/
SSOE
W10
W10
O/Z
IPU
Asynchronous memory output enable/SDRAM row-address strobe/SBSRAM output
enable
AWE/SDWE/
SSWE
V12
V12
O/Z
IPU
Asynchronous memory write enable/SDRAM write enable/SBSRAM write enable
ARDY
Y5
Y5
I
IPU
Asynchronous memory ready input
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ For C6711/11B, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal
to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
For C6711C/11D, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 13-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPD
or 18-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPU. An external pullup or pulldown resistor no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively, should be
used to pull a signal to the opposite supply rail.]
# To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
26
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIF − ADDRESS#
EA21
U18
EA20
Y18
U18
Y18
EA19
W17
W17
EA18
Y16
Y16
EA17
V16
V16
EA16
Y15
Y15
EA15
W15
W15
EA14
Y14
Y14
EA13
W14
W14
EA12
V14
V14
EA11
W13
W13
EA10
V10
V10
EA9
Y9
Y9
EA8
V9
V9
EA7
Y8
Y8
EA6
W8
W8
EA5
V8
V8
EA4
W7
W7
EA3
V7
V7
EA2
Y6
Y6
O/Z
IPU
EMIF external address
EMIF − DATA#
ED31
N3
N3
ED30
P3
P3
ED29
P2
P2
ED28
P1
P1
ED27
R2
R2
ED26
R3
R3
ED25
T2
T2
ED24
T1
T1
ED23
U3
U3
ED22
U1
U1
ED21
U2
U2
ED20
V1
V1
ED19
V2
V2
ED18
Y3
Y3
ED17
W4
W4
I/O/Z
IPU
External data
ED16
V4
V4
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ For C6711/11B, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal
to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
For C6711C/11D, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 13-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPD
or 18-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPU. An external pullup or pulldown resistor no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively, should be
used to pull a signal to the opposite supply rail.]
# To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
27
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIF − DATA (CONTINUED)#
ED15
T19
T19
ED14
T20
T20
ED13
T18
T18
ED12
R20
R20
ED11
R19
R19
ED10
P20
P20
ED9
P18
P18
ED8
N20
N20
ED7
N19
N19
ED6
N18
N18
ED5
M20
M20
ED4
M19
M19
ED3
L19
L19
ED2
L18
L18
ED1
K19
K19
ED0
K18
K18
I/O/Z
IPU
External data
TIMER 1
TOUT1
F1
F1
O
IPD
Timer 1 or general-purpose output
TINP1
F2
F2
I
IPD
Timer 1 or general-purpose input
TOUT0
G1
G1
O
IPD
Timer 0 or general-purpose output
TINP0
G2
G2
I
IPD
Timer 0 or general-purpose input
TIMER 0
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1)
CLKS1
E1
E1
I
IPD
External clock source (as opposed to internal)
On the C6711C/11D device, this pin does not have an internal pulldown (IPD). For
proper C6711C/11D device operation, the CLKS1 pin should either be driven
externally at all times or be pulled up with a 10-kΩ resistor to a valid logic level.
Because it is common for some ICs to 3-state their outputs at times, a 10-kΩ
pullup resistor may be desirable even when an external device is driving the pin.
CLKR1
M1
M1
I/O/Z
IPD
Receive clock
CLKX1
L3
L3
I/O/Z
IPD
Transmit clock
IPU
Receive data
On the C6711C/11D device, this pin does not have an internal pullup (IPU). For
proper C6711C/11D device operation, the DR1 pin should either be driven externally at all times or be pulled up with a 10-kΩ resistor to a valid logic level. Because
it is common for some ICs to 3-state their outputs at times, a 10-kΩ pullup resistor
may be desirable even when an external device is driving the pin.
DR1
M2
M2
I
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ For C6711/11B, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal
to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
For C6711C/11D, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 13-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPD
or 18-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPU. An external pullup or pulldown resistor no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively, should be
used to pull a signal to the opposite supply rail.]
# To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
28
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1) (CONTINUED)
DX1
L2
L2
O/Z
IPU
Transmit data
FSR1
M3
M3
I/O/Z
IPD
Receive frame sync
FSX1
L1
L1
I/O/Z
IPD
Transmit frame sync
CLKS0
K3
K3
I
IPD
External clock source (as opposed to internal)
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 0 (McBSP0)
CLKR0
H3
H3
I/O/Z
IPD
Receive clock
CLKX0
G3
G3
I/O/Z
IPD
Transmit clock
DR0
J1
J1
I
IPU
Receive data
DX0
H2
H2
O/Z
IPU
Transmit data
FSR0
J3
J3
I/O/Z
IPD
Receive frame sync
FSX0
H1
H1
I/O/Z
IPD
Transmit frame sync
GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT (GPIO) MODULE [C6711C/C6711D ONLY]
Clock output at half of device speed [C6711/11B only]
CLKOUT2/
GP[2]
Y12
Y12
I/O/Z
IPD
For the C6711C/11D device, the CLKOUT2 pin is multiplexed with the GP[2] pin.
Clock output at half of device speed (O/Z) [default] (SYSCLK2 internal signal
from the clock generator) or this pin can be programmed as GP[2] (I/O/Z).
When the CLKOUT2 pin is enabled, the CLK2EN bit in the EMIF global control
register (GBLCTL) controls the CLKOUT2 pin (All devices).
CLK2EN = 0:
CLKOUT2 is disabled
CLK2EN = 1:
CLKOUT2 enabled to clock [default]
GP[7](EXT_INT7)
E3
E3
GP[6](EXT_INT6)
D2
D2
GP[5](EXT_INT5)
C1
C1
GP[4](EXT_INT4)
C2
C2
External interrupts [C6711/11B only]
• Edge-driven
• Polarity independently selected via the External Interrupt Polarity Register
bits (EXTPOL.[3:0])
I/O/Z
IPU
General-purpose input/output pins (I/O/Z) which also function as external
interrupts [C6711C/11D only]
• Edge-driven
• Polarity independently selected via the External Interrupt Polarity Register
bits (EXTPOL.[3:0]), in addition to the GPIO registers.
RESERVED FOR TEST
RSV
C12
C12
IPU
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground).
Only the C6711/11B devices have internal pullup (IPU) on this pin.
On the C6711C/11D device, this pin does not have an IPU.
Only the C6711/11B devices have internal pullups (IPUs). For the C6711/11B, the
D12 pin is reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground).
RSV
D12
D12
IPU
On the C6711C/11D device, this pin does not have an IPU. For proper
C6711C/11D device operation, the D12 pin must be externally pulled down with a
10-kΩ resistor.
RSV
A5
A5
IPU
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ For C6711/11B, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal
to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
For C6711C/11D, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 13-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPD
or 18-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPU. An external pullup or pulldown resistor no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively, should be
used to pull a signal to the opposite supply rail.]
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
29
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
RESERVED FOR TEST (CONTINUED)
RSV
D3
—
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
RSV
Y20
—
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground) [C6711/11B]
RSV
N2
N2
RSV
—
N1
Reserved. For proper C6711C/11D device operation, this pin must be externally
pulled up with a 10-kΩ resistor.
RSV
—
B5
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
RSV
—
D7
RSV
—
A12
Reserved. For proper C6711C/11D device operation, this pin must be externally
pulled up with a 10-kΩ resistor.
IPD
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
RSV
—
B11
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ For C6711/11B, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal
to the opposite supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
For C6711C/11D, IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. [These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 13-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPD
or 18-kΩ resistor (approximate) for the IPU. An external pullup or pulldown resistor no greater than 4.4 kΩ and 2.0 kΩ, respectively, should be
used to pull a signal to the opposite supply rail.]
30
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS
DVDD
CVDD
A17
A17
B3
B3
B8
B8
B13
B13
C5
—
C10
C10
D1
D1
D16
D16
D19
D19
F3
F3
H18
H18
J2
J2
M18
M18
N1
—
R1
R1
R18
R18
T3
T3
U5
U5
U7
U7
U12
U12
U16
U16
V13
V13
V15
V15
V19
V19
W3
W3
W9
W9
W12
W12
Y7
Y7
Y17
Y17
—
A4
A9
A9
A10
A10
A12
—
B2
B2
B19
B19
C3
C3
C7
C7
C18
C18
D5
D5
S
3.3-V supply voltage
(see the power-supply decoupling portion of this data sheet)
S
1.4-V supply voltage (C6711D-250)
1.20-V‡ supply voltage (C6711C/C6711D)
1.8-V supply voltage (C6711B/C6711-100)
1.9-V supply voltage (C6711-150)
(see the power-supply decoupling portion of this data sheet)
D6
D6
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ This value is compatible with existing 1.26V designs.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
31
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)
CVDD
D11
D11
D14
D14
D15
D15
F4
F4
F17
F17
K1
K1
K4
K4
K17
K17
L4
L4
L17
L17
L20
L20
R4
R4
R17
R17
U6
U6
U10
U10
U11
U11
U14
U14
U15
U15
V3
V3
V18
V18
W2
W2
W19
W19
A1
A1
A2
A2
S
1.4-V supply voltage (C6711D-250)
1.20‡-V supply voltage (C6711C/C6711D)
1.8-V supply voltage (C6711B/C6711-100)
1.9-V supply voltage (C6711-150)
(see the power-supply decoupling portion of this data sheet)
GROUND PINS
VSS
A11
A11
A14
A14
A19
A19
A20
A20
B1
B1
B4
B4
B11
—
B15
B15
B20
B20
—
C6
C8
C8
C9
C9
D4
D4
GND
Ground pins
D8
D8
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ This value is compatible with existing 1.26V designs.
32
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
VSS
D13
D13
D17
D17
E2
E2
E4
E4
E17
E17
F19
F19
G4
G4
G17
G17
H4
H4
H17
H17
J4
J4
—
J9
—
J10
—
J11
—
J12
K2
K2
—
K9
—
K10
—
K11
—
K12
K20
K20
—
L9
—
L10
—
L11
—
L12
M4
M4
—
M9
—
M10
—
M11
—
M12
M17
M17
N4
N4
N17
N17
P4
P4
P17
P17
P19
P19
T4
T4
T17
T17
GND
Ground pins||
The center thermal balls (J9−J12, K9−K12, L9−L12, M9−M12) [shaded] are all tied to ground
and act as both electrical grounds and thermal relief (thermal dissipation).
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
|| Shaded pin numbers denote the center thermal balls for the GDP package [C6711C/C6711D only].
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
33
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
PIN NO.
GFN
GDP
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
VSS
U4
U4
U8
U8
U9
U9
U13
U13
U17
U17
U20
U20
W1
W1
W5
W5
W11
W11
W16
W16
W20
W20
Y1
Y1
Y2
Y2
Y13
Y13
Y19
Y19
GND
Ground pins
—
Y20
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
34
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
development support
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C6000 DSP platform, including tools to
evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully
integrate and debug software and hardware modules.
The following products support development of C6000 DSP-based applications:
Software Development Tools:
Code Composer Studio Integrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software (DSP/BIOS), which provides the basic run-time target software
needed to support any DSP application.
Hardware Development Tools:
Extended Development System (XDS) Emulator (supports C6000 DSP multiprocessor system debug)
EVM (Evaluation Module)
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320C6000 DSP platform, visit the Texas
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL). For
information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor.
Code Composer Studio, DSP/BIOS, and XDS are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
35
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
device and development-support tool nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all 320
DSP devices and support tools. Each 320 DSP commercial family member has one of three prefixes: SMX,
TMP, or SM. Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for support tools: TMDX
and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development from engineering prototypes
(SMX/ TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (SM /TMDS).
Device development evolutionary flow:
SMX
Preproduction device that is not necessarily representative of the final device’s electrical
specifications
TMP
Final silicon die that conforms to the device’s electrical specifications but has not completed
quality and reliability verification
SM
Fully qualified production device
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification
testing.
TMDS
Fully qualified development-support product
SMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped with appropriate disclaimers
describing their limitations and intended uses. Preproduction devices (SMX) may not be representative of a final
product and Texas Instruments reserves the right to change or discontinue these products without notice.
SM devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and reliability
of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI’s standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that preproduction devices (SMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system
because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the package type
(for example, GDP), the temperature range (for example, blank is the default commercial temperature range
and A is the extended temperature range), and the device speed range in megahertz (for example, 16 is
167 MHz).
Table 18 identifies the C6711/11B/11C/11D device part numbers (orderables). For more details and for ordering
information, see the TI website (www.ti.com). Figure 5 provides a legend for reading the complete device name
for any TMS3206000 DSP family member.
TMS320 is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
36
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
device and development-support tool nomenclature (continued)
Table 18. 320C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D Device Part Numbers (P/Ns) and Ordering Information
DEVICE ORDERABLE P/N
DEVICE SPEED
CVDD
(CORE
VOLTAGE)
DVDD
(I/O
VOLTAGE)
OPERATING CASE
TEMPERATURE
RANGE
1.20† V
1.20† V
3.3 V
−40_C to105_C
3.3 V
−40_C to 85_C
C6711D
SM32C6711DGDPA16EP
167 MHz/1000 MFLOPS
SM32C6711DGDPI20EP
167 MHz/1000 MFLOPS
SM
32
C 6711D GDP
PREFIX
TMX = Experimental device
TMP = Prototype device
TMS = Qualified device
SMJ = MIL-PRF-38535, QML
SM = High Rel (non-38535)
(A)
16
DEVICE SPEED RANGE
167 MHz
TEMPERATURE RANGE (DEFAULT: 0°C TO 90°C)
Blank = 0°C to 90°C, commercial temperature
A
= −40°C to 105°C, extended temperature
DEVICE FAMILY
32 or 320 = TMS320 DSP family
PACKAGE TYPE†
GDP = 272-pin plastic BGA
GFN = 256-pin plastic BGA
GGP = 352-pin plastic BGA
GJC = 352-pin plastic BGA
GJL = 352-pin plastic BGA
GLS = 384-pin plastic BGA
GLW = 340-pin plastic BGA
GNY = 384-pin plastic BGA
GNZ = 352-pin plastic BGA
GLZ = 532-pin plastic BGA
GHK = 288-pin plastic MicroStar BGAt
PYP = 208-pin PowerPADt plastic QFP
TECHNOLOGY
C = CMOS
DEVICE
C6000 DSPs:
C6711D C6712D C6713B
† BGA =
QFP =
Ball Grid Array
Quad Flatpack
Figure 5. TMS320C6000 DSP Device Nomenclature (Including the 320C6711, 320C6711B,
320C6711C, and 320C6711D Devices)
MicroStar BGA and PowerPAD are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
† This value is compatible with existing 1.26V devices.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
37
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
documentation support
Extensive documentation supports all TMS320 DSP family generations of devices from product
announcement through applications development. The types of documentation available include: data sheets,
such as this document, with design specifications; complete user’s reference guides for all devices and tools;
technical briefs; development-support tools; on-line help; and hardware and software applications. The
following is a brief, descriptive list of support documentation specific to the C6000 DSP devices:
The TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189) describes the
C6000 CPU (DSP core) architecture, instruction set, pipeline, and associated interrupts.
The TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide [hereafter referred to as the C6000 PRG
Overview] (literature number SPRU190) provides an overview and briefly describes the functionality of the
peripherals available on the C6000 DSP platform of devices. This document also includes a table listing the
peripherals available on the C6000 devices along with literature numbers and hyperlinks to the associated
peripheral documents. These C6711C/C6711D peripherals, except the PLL, are similar to the peripherals on
the TMS320C6711 and TMS320C64x devices; therefore, see the TMS320C6711 (C6711 or C67x) peripheral
information, and in some cases, where indicated, see the TMS320C6711 (C6711 or TMS320C67x or C67x)
peripheral information, and in some cases, where indicated, see the C64x information in the C6000 PRG
Overview (literature number SPRU190).
TMS320C6000 DSP Software-Programmable Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) Controller Reference Guide
(literature number SPRU233) describes the functionality of the PLL peripheral available on the C6711C/11D
device.
The TMS320C6000 Technical Brief (literature number SPRU197) gives an introduction to the
TMS320C62x/TMS320C67x devices, associated development tools, and third-party support.
The Migrating from TMS320C6211B/6711B to TMS320C6711C application report (literature number SPRA837)
describes the differences and issues of interest related to migration from the Texas Instruments TMS320C6211,
TMS320C6211B, TMS320C6711, and TMS320C6711B devices, GFN packages, to the TMS320C6711C
device, GDP package.
The TMS320C6711/TMS320C6711B/TMS320C6711C/TMS320C6711D Digital Signal Processors Silicon
Errata (C6711 Silicon Revisions 1.0, 1.2, and 1.3; C6711B Silicon Revisions 2.0 and 2.1; and C6711C Silicon
Revision 1.1; and C6711D Silicon Revision 2.0) [literature number SPRZ173K or later] categorizes and
describes the known exceptions to the functional specifications and usage notes for the TMS320C6711,
TMS320C6711B, TMS320C6711C, and TMS320C6711D DSP devices.
The TMS320C6713/12C/11C Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA889)
discusses the power consumption for user applications with the TMS320C6713, TMS320C6712C, and
TMS320C6711C DSP devices.
The Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839) describes how to
properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system.
The tools support documentation is electronically available within the Code Composer Studio Integrated
Development Environment (IDE). For a complete listing of C6000 DSP latest documentation, visit the Texas
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL).
See the Worldwide Web URL for the application reports How To Begin Development Today with the
TMS320C6211 DSP (literature number SPRA474) and How To Begin Development with the TMS320C6711
DSP (literature number SPRA522), which describe in more detail the similarities/differences between the C6211
and C6711 C6000 DSP devices.
TMS320C62x is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
38
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
CPU CSR register description
The CPU control status register (CSR) contains the CPU ID and CPU Revision ID (bits 16−31) as well as the
status of the device power-down modes [PWRD field (bits 15−10)], program and data cache control modes, the
endian bit (EN, bit 8) and the global interrupt enable (GIE, bit 0) and previous GIE (PGIE, bit 1). Figure 6 and
Table 19 identify the bit fields in the CPU CSR register.
For more detailed information on the bit fields in the CPU CSR register, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals
Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190) and the TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set
Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).
31
24 23
15
16
CPU ID
REVISION ID
R-0x02
R-0x02 [C6711/11B]
R-0x03 [C6711C/11D]
10
9
8
7
6
PWRD
SAT
EN
PCC
R/W-0
R/C-0
R-1
R/W-0
5 4
2
1
0
DCC
PGIE
GIE
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
Legend: R = Readable by the MVC instruction, R/W = Readable/Writeable by the MVC instruction; W = Read/write; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after
reset, C = Clearable by the MVC instruction
Figure 6. CPU Control Status Register (CPU CSR)
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
39
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
CPU CSR register description (continued)
Table 19. CPU CSR Register Bit Field Description
BIT #
NAME
31:24
CPU ID
23:16
REVISION ID
DESCRIPTION
CPU ID + REV ID. Read only.
Identifies which CPU is used and defines the silicon revision of the CPU.
CPU ID + REVISION ID (31:16) are combined for a value of: 0x0202 for C6711/11B and 0x0203 for
C6711C/11D
Control power-down modes. The values are always read as zero.
15:10
9
8
7:5
4:2
PWRD
000000
001001
010001
011010
011100
Others
=
=
=
=
=
=
no power-down (default)
PD1, wake-up by an enabled interrupt
PD1, wake-up by an enabled or not enabled interrupt
PD2, wake-up by a device reset
PD3, wake-up by a device reset
Reserved
SAT
Saturate bit.
Set when any unit performs a saturate. This bit can be cleared only by the MVC instruction and can
be set only by a functional unit. The set by the a functional unit has priority over a clear (by the MVC
instruction) if they occur on the same cycle. The saturate bit is set one full cycle (one delay slot) after
a saturate occurs. This bit will not be modified by a conditional instruction whose condition is false.
EN
Endian bit. This bit is read-only.
Depicts the device endian mode.
0 = Big Endian mode.
1 = Little Endian mode [default].
PCC
Program Cache control mode.
L1D, Level 1 Program Cache
000/010 =
Cache Enabled / Cache accessed and updated on reads.
All other PCC values reserved.
DCC
Data Cache control mode.
L1D, Level 1 Data Cache
000/010 =
Cache Enabled / 2-Way Cache
All other DCC values reserved
Previous GIE (global interrupt enable); saves the Global Interrupt Enable (GIE) when an interrupt is
taken. Allows for proper nesting of interrupts.
1
PGIE
0 = Previous GIE value is 0. (default)
1 = Previous GIE value is 1.
Global interrupt enable bit.
Enables (1) or disables (0) all interrupts except the reset interrupt and NMI (nonmaskable interrupt).
0
GIE
0 = Disables all interrupts (except the reset interrupt and NMI) [default]
1 = Enables all interrupts (except the reset interrupt and NMI)
40
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
cache configuration (CCFG) register description (11D)
The C6711D device includes an enhancement to the cache configuration (CCFG) register. A “P” bit
(CCFG.31) allows the programmer to select the priority of accesses to L2 memory originating from the transfer
crossbar (TC) over accesses originating from the L1D memory system. An important class of TC accesses is
EDMA transfers, which move data to or from the L2 memory. While the EDMA normally has no issue accessing
L2 memory due to the high hit rates on the L1D memory system, there are pathological cases where certain
CPU behavior could block the EDMA from accessing the L2 memory for long enough to cause a missed deadline
when transferring data to a peripheral such as the McASP or McBSP. This can be avoided by setting the P bit
to “1” because the EDMA will assume a higher priority than the L1D memory system when accessing L2
memory.
For more detailed information on the P-bit function and for silicon advisories concerning EDMA L2 memory
accesses blocked, see the TMS320C6711/TMS320C6711B/TMS320C6711C/TMS320C6711D Digital Signal
Processors Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ173K or later).
31
30
P†
R/W-0
10
7
9
8
3 2
0
Reserved
IP
ID
Reserved
L2MODE
R-x
W-0
W-0
R-0 0000
R/W-000
Legend: R = Readable; R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset; -x = undefined value after reset
† Unlike the C6711/11B/11C devices, the C6711D device includes a P bit.
Figure 7. Cache Configuration Register (CCFG)
Table 20. CCFG Register Bit Field Description
BIT #
NAME
DESCRIPTION
L1D requestor priority to L2 bit.
P = 0: L1D requests to L2 higher priority than TC requests
P = 1: TC requests to L2 higher priority than L1D requests
31
P
30:10
Reserved
9
IP
Invalidate L1P bit.
0 = Normal L1P operation
1 = All L1P lines are invalidated
8
ID
Invalidate L1D bit.
0 = Normal L1D operation
1 = All L1D lines are invalidated
7:3
Reserved
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
L2 operation mode bits (L2MODE).
2:0
L2MODE
000b =
001b =
010b =
011b =
111b =
All others
L2 Cache disabled (All SRAM mode) [64K SRAM]
1-way Cache (16K L2 Cache) / [48K SRAM]
2-way Cache (32K L2 Cache) / [32K SRAM]
3-way Cache (48K L2 Cache) / [16K SRAM]
4-way Cache (64K L2 Cache) / [no SRAM]
Reserved
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
41
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
interrupt sources and interrupt selector [C6711/11B only]
The C67x DSP core on the C6711/C6711B device supports 16 prioritized interrupts, which are listed in Table 21.
The highest-priority interrupt is INT_00 (dedicated to RESET) while the lowest-priority interrupt is INT_15. The
first four interrupts (INT_00−INT_03) are non-maskable and fixed. The remaining interrupts (INT_04−INT_15)
are maskable and default to the interrupt source specified in Table 21. The interrupt source for interrupts 4−15
can be programmed by modifying the selector value (binary value) in the corresponding fields of the Interrupt
Selector Control registers: MUXH (address 0x019C0000) and MUXL (address 0x019C0004).
Table 21. C6711/C6711B DSP Interrupts
INTERRUPT
SELECTOR
CONTROL
REGISTER
SELECTOR
VALUE
(BINARY)
INTERRUPT
EVENT
INT_00†
INT_01†
−
−
RESET
−
−
NMI
INT_02†
INT_03†
−
−
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
−
−
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
INT_04‡
INT_05‡
MUXL[4:0]
00100
EXT_INT4
External interrupt pin 4
MUXL[9:5]
00101
EXT_INT5
External interrupt pin 5
INT_06‡
INT_07‡
MUXL[14:10]
00110
EXT_INT6
External interrupt pin 6
MUXL[20:16]
00111
EXT_INT7
External interrupt pin 7
INT_08‡
INT_09‡
MUXL[25:21]
01000
EDMA_INT
EDMA channel (0 through 15) interrupt
MUXL[30:26]
01001
Reserved
INT_10‡
INT_11‡
MUXH[4:0]
00011
SD_INT
MUXH[9:5]
01010
Reserved
None, but programmable
INT_12‡
INT_13‡
MUXH[14:10]
01011
Reserved
None, but programmable
MUXH[20:16]
00000
DSP_INT
Host-port interface (HPI)-to-DSP interrupt
INT_14‡
INT_15‡
MUXH[25:21]
00001
TINT0
Timer 0 interrupt
MUXH[30:26]
00010
TINT1
Timer 1 interrupt
−
−
01100
XINT0
McBSP0 transmit interrupt
−
−
01101
RINT0
McBSP0 receive interrupt
−
−
01110
XINT1
McBSP1 transmit interrupt
−
−
01111
RINT1
McBSP1 receive interrupt
−
−
10000 − 11111
Reserved
CPU
INTERRUPT
NUMBER
INTERRUPT SOURCE
None, but programmable
EMIF SDRAM timer interrupt
Reserved. Do not use.
† Interrupts INT_00 through INT_03 are non-maskable and fixed.
‡ Interrupts INT_04 through INT_15 are programmable by modifying the binary selector values in the Interrupt Selector Control
registers fields. Table 21 shows the default interrupt sources for interrupts INT_04 through INT_15. For more detailed
information on interrupt sources and selection, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Interrupt Selector Reference Guide (literature
number SPRU646).
42
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
interrupt sources and interrupt selector [11C/11D only]
The C67x DSP core on the C6711C/C6711D supports 16 prioritized interrupts, which are listed in Table 22. The
highest priority interrupt is INT_00 (dedicated to RESET) while the lowest priority is INT_15. The first four
interrupts are non-maskable and fixed. The remaining interrupts (4−15) are maskable and default to the interrupt
source listed in Table 22. However, their interrupt source may be reprogrammed to any one of the sources listed
in Table 23 (Interrupt Selector). Table 23 lists the selector value corresponding to each of the alternate interrupt
sources. The selector choice for interrupts 4−15 is made by programming the corresponding fields (listed in
Table 22) in the MUXH (address 0x019C0000) and MUXL (address 0x019C0004) registers.
Table 22. DSP Interrupts [C6711C/C6711D]
Table 23. Interrupt Selector [11C/11D]
DSP
INTERRUPT
NUMBER
INTERRUPT
SELECTOR
CONTROL
REGISTER
DEFAULT
SELECTOR
VALUE
(BINARY)
DEFAULT
INTERRUPT
EVENT
INTERRUPT
SELECTOR
VALUE
(BINARY)
INTERRUPT
EVENT
INT_00
−
−
RESET
00000
DSPINT
HPI
INT_01
−
−
NMI
00001
TINT0
Timer 0
INT_02
−
−
Reserved
00010
TINT1
Timer 1
INT_03
−
−
00011
SDINT
EMIF
INT_04
MUXL[4:0]
00100
Reserved
GPINT4†
00100
GPIO
INT_05
MUXL[9:5]
00101
INT_06
MUXL[14:10]
00110
GPINT5†
GPINT6†
GPINT4†
GPINT5†
GPIO
00101
MODULE
GPIO
INT_07
MUXL[20:16]
00111
GPINT7†
00111
GPINT6†
GPINT7†
INT_08
MUXL[25:21]
01000
EDMAINT
01000
EDMAINT
EDMA
INT_09
MUXL[30:26]
01001
EMUDTDMA
01001
EMUDTDMA
Emulation
INT_10
MUXH[4:0]
00011
SDINT
01010
EMURTDXRX
Emulation
INT_11
MUXH[9:5]
01010
EMURTDXRX
01011
EMURTDXTX
Emulation
INT_12
MUXH[14:10]
01011
EMURTDXTX
01100
XINT0
McBSP0
INT_13
MUXH[20:16]
00000
DSPINT
01101
RINT0
McBSP0
INT_14
MUXH[25:21]
00001
TINT0
01110
XINT1
McBSP1
INT_15
MUXH[30:26]
00010
TINT1
01111
RINT1
McBSP1
10000
GPINT0
GPIO
00110
GPIO
† Interrupt Events GPINT4, GPINT5, GPINT6, and GPINT7 are outputs from the GPIO module (GP). They originate from the device pins
GP[4](EXT_INT4), GP[5](EXT_INT5), GP[6](EXT_INT6), and GP[7](EXT_INT7). These pins can be used as edge-sensitive EXT_INTx
with polarity controlled by the External Interrupt Polarity Register (EXTPOL.[3:0]). The corresponding pins must first be enabled in the GPIO
module by setting the corresponding enable bits in the GP Enable Register (GPEN.[7:4]), and configuring them as inputs in the GP Direction
Register (GPDIR.[7:4]). These interrupts can be controlled through the GPIO module in addition to the simple EXTPOL.[3:0] bits. For more
information on interrupt control via the GPIO module, see the TMS320C6000 DSP General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide
(literature number SPRU584). [C6711C/C6711D only].
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
43
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
EDMA channel synchronization events [C6711/11B only]
The C67x EDMA on the C6711/C6711B device supports up to 16 EDMA channels. Four of the sixteen channels
(channels 8−11) are reserved for EDMA chaining, leaving 12 EDMA channels available to service peripheral
devices. Table 24 lists the source of synchronization events associated with each of the programmable EDMA
channels. For the C6711/11B, the association of an event to a channel is fixed; each of the EDMA channels has
one specific event associated with it. For more detailed information on the EDMA module, associated channels,
and event-transfer chaining, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller
Reference Guide (literature number SPRU234).
Table 24. 320C6711/C6711B EDMA Channel Synchronization Events
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
0
DSP_INT
1
TINT0
Timer 0 interrupt
2
TINT1
Timer 1 interrupt
3
SD_INT
4
EXT_INT4
External interrupt pin 4
5
EXT_INT5
External interrupt pin 5
6
EXT_INT6
External interrupt pin 6
7
8†
EXT_INT7
External interrupt pin 7
EVENT DESCRIPTION
Host-port interface (HPI)-to-DSP interrupt
EMIF SDRAM timer interrupt
EDMA_TCC8
EDMA transfer complete code (TCC) 1000b interrupt
9†
10†
EDMA_TCC9
EDMA TCC 1001b interrupt
EDMA_TCC10
EDMA TCC 1010b interrupt
11†
EDMA_TCC11
EDMA TCC 1011b interrupt
12
XEVT0
McBSP0 transmit event
13
REVT0
McBSP0 receive event
14
XEVT1
McBSP1 transmit event
15
REVT1
McBSP1 receive event
† EDMA channels 8 through 11 are used for transfer chaining only. For more detailed information on event-transfer chaining, see the
TMS320C6000 DSP Enhanced Direct Memory Access (EDMA) Controller Reference Guide (literature number SPRU234).
44
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
EDMA module and EDMA selector [C6711C/11D only]
The C67x EDMA for the C6711C/C6711D device also supports up to 16 EDMA channels. Four of the sixteen
channels (channels 8−11) are reserved for EDMA chaining, leaving 12 EDMA channels available to service
peripheral devices. On the C6711C/C6711D device, the user, through the EDMA selector registers, can control
the EDMA channels servicing peripheral devices.
The EDMA selector registers are located at addresses 0x01A0FF00 (ESEL0), 0x01A0FF04 (ESEL1), and
0x01A0FF0C (ESEL3). These EDMA selector registers control the mapping of the EDMA events to the EDMA
channels. Each EDMA event has an assigned EDMA selector code (see Table 26). By loading each EVTSELx
register field with an EDMA selector code, users can map any desired EDMA event to any specified EDMA
channel. Table 25 lists the default EDMA selector value for each EDMA channel.
See Table 27 and Table 28 for the EDMA Event Selector registers and their associated bit descriptions.
Table 25. EDMA Channels [C6711C/C6711D Only]
Table 26. EDMA Selector [11C/11D Only]
EDMA
CHANNEL
EDMA
SELECTOR
CONTROL
REGISTER
DEFAULT
SELECTOR
VALUE
(BINARY)
DEFAULT
EDMA
EVENT
EDMA
SELECTOR
CODE (BINARY)
EDMA
EVENT
MODULE
0
ESEL0[5:0]
000000
DSPINT
000000
DSPINT
HPI
1
ESEL0[13:8]
000001
TINT0
000001
TINT0
TIMER0
2
ESEL0[21:16]
000010
TINT1
000010
TINT1
TIMER1
3
ESEL0[29:24]
000011
SDINT
000011
SDINT
EMIF
4
ESEL1[5:0]
000100
GPINT4†
000100
GPINT4†
GPIO
5
ESEL1[13:8]
000101
GPINT5†
000101
GPINT5†
GPIO
6
ESEL1[21:16]
000110
GPINT6†
000110
GPINT6†
GPIO
7
ESEL1[29:24]
000111
GPINT7†
000111
GPINT7†
GPIO
8
−
−
TCC8 (Chaining)
001000
9
−
−
TCC9 (Chaining)
001001
10
−
−
TCC10 (Chaining)
001010
11
−
−
TCC11 (Chaining)
001011
12
ESEL3[5:0]
001100
XEVT0
001100
XEVT0
McBSP0
13
ESEL3[13:8]
001101
REVT0
001101
REVT0
McBSP0
14
ESEL3[21:16]
001110
XEVT1
001110
XEVT1
McBSP1
15
ESEL3[29:24]
001111
REVT1
001111
REVT1
010000−111111
Reserved
Reserved
GPINT2
GPIO
Reserved
McBSP1
Reserved
† The GPINT[4−7] interrupt events are sourced from the GPIO module via the external interrupt capable GP[4−7] pins [11C/11D only].
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
45
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
EDMA module and EDMA selector [C6711C/11D only] (continued)
Table 27. EDMA Event Selector Registers (ESEL0, ESEL1, and ESEL3)
ESEL0 Register (0x01A0 FF00)
30
31
29
28
27
24
23
22
21
20
19
Reserved
EVTSEL3
Reserved
EVTSEL2
R−0
R/W−00 0011b
R−0
R/W−00 0010b
14
15
13
12
11
8
7
6
5
4
16
0
3
Reserved
EVTSEL1
Reserved
EVTSEL0
R−0
R/W−00 0001b
R−0
R/W−00 0000b
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
ESEL1 Register (0x01A0 FF04)
30
31
29
28
27
24
23
22
21
20
19
Reserved
EVTSEL7
Reserved
EVTSEL6
R−0
R/W−00 0111b
R−0
R/W−00 0110b
14
15
13
12
11
8
6 5
7
4
16
0
3
Reserved
EVTSEL5
Reserved
EVTSEL4
R−0
R/W−00 0101b
R−0
R/W−00 0100b
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
ESEL3 Register (0x01A0 FF0C)
30
31
29
28
27
24
23
22
21
20
19
Reserved
EVTSEL15
Reserved
EVTSEL14
R−0
R/W−00 1111b
R−0
R/W−00 1110b
14
15
13
12
11
8
7
6
5
4
16
3
0
Reserved
EVTSEL13
Reserved
EVTSEL12
R−0
R/W−00 1101b
R−0
R/W−00 1100b
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
Table 28. EDMA Event Selection Registers (ESEL0, ESEL1, and ESEL3) Description
BIT #
NAME
31:30
23:22
15:14
7:6
Reserved
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
EDMA event selection bits for channel x. Allows mapping of the EDMA events to the EDMA channels.
29:24
21:16
13:8
5:0
EVTSELx
The EVTSEL0 through EVTSEL15 bits correspond to the channels 0 to 15, respectively. These
EVTSELx fields are user−selectable. By configuring the EVTSELx fields to the EDMA selector value
of the desired EDMA sync event number (see Table 26), users can map any EDMA event to the
EDMA channel.
For example, if EVTSEL15 is programmed to 00 0001b (the EDMA selector code for TINT0), then
channel 15 is triggered by Timer0 TINT0 events.
46
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
clock PLL [C6711/11B only]
All of the internal C6711/11B clocks are generated from a single source through the CLKIN pin. This source clock
either drives the PLL, which multiplies the source clock in frequency to generate the internal CPU clock, or
bypasses the PLL to become the internal CPU clock.
To use the PLL to generate the CPU clock, the external PLL filter circuit must be properly designed. Figure 8
shows the external PLL circuitry for either x1 (PLL bypass) or x4 PLL multiply modes. Figure 9 shows the
external PLL circuitry for a system with ONLY x1 (PLL bypass) mode.
To minimize the clock jitter, a single clean power supply should power both the C6711/11B device and the
external clock oscillator circuit. Noise coupling into PLLF will directly impact PLL clock jitter. The minimum
CLKIN rise and fall times should also be observed. For the input clock timing requirements, see the input and
output clocks electrical section.
Rise/fall times, duty cycles (high/low pulse durations), and the load capacitance of the external clock source
must meet the DSP requirements in this data sheet (see the electrical characteristics over recommended
ranges of supply voltage and operating case temperature table and the input and output clocks electricals
section). Table 29 lists some examples of compatible CLKIN external clock sources:
Table 29. Compatible CLKIN External Clock Sources [C6711/11B]
COMPATIBLE PARTS FOR
EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCES (CLKIN)
PART NUMBER
MANUFACTURER
JITO-2
Fox Electronix
STA series, ST4100 series
SaRonix Corporation
Oscillators
PLL
SG-636
Epson America
342
Corning Frequency Control
ICS525-02
Integrated Circuit Systems
3.3V
EMI Filter
PLLV
Internal to
C6711/C6711B
PLL
CLKMODE0
C3
10 mF
PLLMULT
C4
0.1 mF
PLLCLK
CLKIN
CLKIN
1
LOOP FILTER
0
CPU
CLOCK
PLL Multiply
Factors
CPU Clock
Frequency
f(CPUCLOCK)
0
x1(BYPASS)
1 x f(CLKIN)
1
x4
4 x f(CLKIN)
C2
PLLG
CLKMODE0
PLLF
Available Multiply Factors
(For C1, C2, and R1 values, see Table 30.)
C1
R1
NOTES: A. Keep the lead length and the number of vias between the PLLF pin, the PLLG pin, and R1, C1, and C2 to a minimum. In addition,
place all PLL external components (R1, C1, C2, C3, C4, and the EMI Filter) as close to the C6000 device as possible. For the best
performance, TI recommends that all the PLL external components be on a single side of the board without jumpers, switches, or
components other than the ones shown.
B. For reduced PLL jitter, maximize the spacing between switching signals and the PLL external components (R1, C1, C2, C3, C4,
and the EMI filter).
C. The 3.3-V supply for the EMI filter must be from the same 3.3-V power plane supplying the I/O voltage, DVDD.
D. EMI filter manufacturer: TDK part number ACF451832-333, 223, 153, 103. Panasonic part number EXCCET103U.
Figure 8. External PLL Circuitry for Either PLL x4 Mode or x1 (Bypass) Mode [C6711/11B]
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
47
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
clock PLL [C6711/11B only] (continued)
3.3V
PLLV
CLKMODE0
Internal to
C6711/C6711B
PLL
PLLMULT
PLLCLK
CLKIN
CLKIN
LOOP FILTER
1
CPU
CLOCK
PLLF
PLLG
0
NOTES: A. For a system with ONLY PLL x1 (bypass) mode, short the PLLF terminal to the PLLG terminal.
B. The 3.3-V supply for the EMI filter must be from the same 3.3-V power plane supplying the I/O voltage, DVDD.
Figure 9. External PLL Circuitry for x1 (Bypass) Mode Only [C6711/11B]
Table 30. C6711/C6711B PLL Component Selection
CLKMODE
CLKIN
RANGE
(MHz)
CPU CLOCK
FREQUENCY
(CLKOUT1)
RANGE (MHz)
CLKOUT2
RANGE
(MHz)
R1 [±1%]
(Ω)
C1 [±10%]
(nF)
C2 [±10%]
(pF)
TYPICAL
LOCK TIME
(µs)†
x4
16.3−41.6
65−167
32.5−83
60.4
27
560
75
† Under some operating conditions, the maximum PLL lock time may vary as much as 150% from the specified typical value. For example, if the
typical lock time is specified as 100 µs, the maximum value may be as long as 250 µs.
48
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/C6711D only]
The 320C6711C/C6711D includes a PLL and a flexible PLL controller peripheral consisting of a prescaler (D0)
and four dividers (OSCDIV1, D1, D2, and D3). The PLL controller is able to generate different clocks for different
parts of the system (i.e., DSP core, Peripheral Data Bus, External Memory Interface, McASP, and other
peripherals). Figure 10 illustrates the PLL, the PLL controller, and the clock generator logic.
PLLHV
+3.3 V
C1
EMI filter
10 µF
C2
0.1 µF
CLKMODE0
PLLOUT
CLKIN
PLLREF
DIVIDER D0
/1, /2,
..., /32
1
0
Reserved
ENA
PLLEN (PLL_CSR.[0])
PLL
x4 to x25
1
0
D1EN (PLLDIV1.[15])
D0EN (PLLDIV0.[15])
OSCDIV1
CLKOUT3
For Use
in System
D2EN (PLLDIV2.[15])
/1, /2,
..., /32
ENA
DIVIDER D1†
/1, /2,
..., /32
ENA
SYSCLK1
(DSP Core)
DIVIDER D2†
/1, /2,
..., /32
ENA
SYSCLK2
(Peripherals)
DIVIDER D3
/1, /2,
..., /32
OD1EN (OSCDIV1.[15])
D3EN (PLLDIV3.[15])
SYSCLK3
ENA
ECLKIN
(EMIF Clock Input)
1
0
EKSRC Bit
(DEVCFG.[4])
EMIF
C6711C/C6711D DSPs
ECLKOUT
† Dividers D1 and D2 must never be disabled. Never write a “0” to the D1EN or D2EN bits in the PLLDIV1 and PLLDIV2 registers.
NOTES: A. Place all PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI Filter) as close to the C67x DSP device as possible. For the best
performance, TI recommends that all the PLL external components be on a single side of the board without jumpers, switches, or
components other than the ones shown.
B. For reduced PLL jitter, maximize the spacing between switching signals and the PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI
Filter).
C. The 3.3-V supply for the EMI filter must be from the same 3.3-V power plane supplying the I/O voltage, DVDD.
D. EMI filter manufacturer TDK part number ACF451832-333, -223, -153, -103. Panasonic part number EXCCET103U.
Figure 10. PLL and Clock Generator Logic [C6711C/C6711D Only]
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
49
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/C6711D only] (continued)
The PLL Reset Time is the amount of wait time needed when resetting the PLL (writing PLLRST=1), in order
for the PLL to properly reset, before bringing the PLL out of reset (writing PLLRST = 0). For the PLL Reset Time
value, see Table 31. The PLL Lock Time is the amount of time from when PLLRST = 0 with PLLEN = 0 (PLL
out of reset, but still bypassed) to when the PLLEN bit can be safely changed to “1” (switching from bypass to
the PLL path), see Table 31 and Figure 10.
Under some operating conditions, the maximum PLL Lock Time may vary from the specified typical value. For
the PLL Lock Time values, see Table 31.
Table 31. PLL Lock and Reset Times (C6711C/C6711D only)
MIN
PLL Lock Time
PLL Reset Time
TYP
MAX
UNIT
75
187.5
µs
125
ns
Table 32 shows the C6711C/C6711D device’s CLKOUT signals, how they are derived and by what register
control bits, and the default settings. For more details on the PLL, see the PLL and Clock Generator Logic
diagram (Figure 10).
Table 32. CLKOUT Signals, Default Settings, and Control
CLOCK OUTPUT
SIGNAL NAME
DEFAULT SETTING
(ENABLED or DISABLED)
CONTROL
BIT(s) (Register)
CLKOUT2
ON (ENABLED)
D2EN = 1 (PLLDIV2.[15])
CK2EN = 1 (EMIF GBLCTL.[3])
CLKOUT3
ON (ENABLED)
OD1EN = 1 (OSCDIV1.[15])
DESCRIPTION
SYSCLK2 selected [default]
Derived from CLKIN
SYSCLK3 selected [default].
ECLKOUT
ON (ENABLED);
derived from SYSCLK3
EKSRC = 0 (DEVCFG.[4])
EKEN = 1 (EMIF GBLCTL.[5])
To select ECLKIN as source:
EKSRC = 1 (DEVCFG.[4]) and
EKEN = 1 (EMIF GBLCTL.[5])
This input clock is directly available as an internal high-frequency clock source that may be divided down by
a programmable divider OSCDIV1 (/1, /2, /3, ..., /32) and output on the CLKOUT3 pin for other use in the system.
Figure 10 shows that the input clock source may be divided down by divider PLLDIV0 (/1, /2, ..., /32) and then
multiplied up by a factor of x4, x5, x6, and so on, up to x25.
Either the input clock (PLLEN = 0) or the PLL output (PLLEN = 1) then serves as the high-frequency reference
clock for the rest of the DSP system. The DSP core clock, the peripheral bus clock, and the EMIF clock may
be divided down from this high-frequency clock (each with a unique divider) . For example, with a 40-MHz input,
if the PLL output is configured for 400 MHz, the DSP core may be operated at 200 MHz (/2) while the EMIF may
be configured to operate at a rate of 75 MHz (/6). Note that there is a specific minimum and maximum reference
clock (PLLREF) and output clock (PLLOUT) for the block labeled PLL in Figure 10, as well as for the DSP core,
peripheral bus, and EMIF. The clock generator must not be configured to exceed any of these constraints
(certain combinations of external clock input, internal dividers, and PLL multiply ratios might not be supported).
See Table 33 for the PLL clocks input and output frequency ranges.
50
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/C6711D only] (continued)
Table 33. PLL Clock Frequency Ranges†‡
GDPA-167
GDP-200
CLOCK SIGNAL
UNIT
MIN
MAX
PLLREF (PLLEN = 1)
12
100
MHz
PLLOUT
140
600
MHz
SYSCLK1
−
Device Speed (DSP Core)
MHz
SYSCLK3 (EKSRC = 0)
−
100
MHz
† SYSCLK2 rate must be exactly half of SYSCLK1.
‡ Also see the electrical specification (timing requirements and switching characteristics parameters) in the Input
and Output Clocks section of this data sheet.
The EMIF itself may be clocked by an external reference clock via the ECLKIN pin or can be generated on-chip
as SYSCLK3. SYSCLK3 is derived from divider D3 off of PLLOUT (see Figure 10, PLL and Clock Generator
Logic). The EMIF clock selection is programmable via the EKSRC bit in the DEVCFG register.
The settings for the PLL multiplier and each of the dividers in the clock generation block may be reconfigured
via software at run time. If either the input to the PLL changes due to D0, CLKMODE0, or CLKIN, or if the PLL
multiplier is changed, then software must enter bypass first and stay in bypass until the PLL has had enough
time to lock (see electrical specifications). For the programming procedure, see the TMS320C6000 DSP
Software-Programmable Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) Controller Reference Guide (literature number SPRU233).
SYSCLK2 is the internal clock source for peripheral bus control. SYSCLK2 (Divider D2) must be programmed
to be half of the SYSCLK1 rate. For example, if D1 is configured to divide-by-2 mode (/2), then D2 must be
programmed to divide-by-4 mode (/4). SYSCLK2 is also tied directly to CLKOUT2 pin (see Figure 10).
During the programming transition of Divider D1 and Divider D2 (resulting in SYSCLK1 and SYSCLK2 output
clocks, see Figure 10), the order of programming the PLLDIV1 and PLLDIV2 registers must be observed to
ensure that SYSCLK2 always runs at half the SYSCLK1 rate or slower. For example, if the divider ratios of D1
and D2 are to be changed from /1, /2 (respectively) to /5, /10 (respectively) then, the PLLDIV2 register must be
programmed before the PLLDIV1 register. The transition ratios become /1, /2; /1, /10; and then /5, /10. If the
divider ratios of D1 and D2 are to be changed from /3, /6 to /1, /2 then, the PLLDIV1 register must be programmed
before the PLLDIV2 register. The transition ratios, for this case, become /3, /6; /1, /6; and then /1, /2. The final
SYSCLK2 rate must be exactly half of the SYSCLK1 rate.
Note that Divider D1 and Divider D2 must always be enabled (i.e., D1EN and D2EN bits are set to “1” in the
PLLDIV1 and PLLDIV2 registers).
The PLL Controller registers should be modified only by the CPU or via emulation. The HPI should not be used
to directly access the PLL Controller registers.
For detailed information on the clock generator (PLL Controller registers) and their associated software bit
descriptions, see Table 34 through Table 37.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
51
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/C6711D only] (continued)
PLLCSR Register (0x01B7 C100)
28
31
27
24
23
20 19
16
Reserved
R−0
15
12
11
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
STABLE
Reserved
PLLRST
Reserved
PLLPWRDN
PLLEN
R−0
R−x
R−0
RW−1
R/W−0
R/W−0b
RW−0
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
Table 34. PLL Control/Status Register (PLLCSR)
BIT #
NAME
31:7
Reserved
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
6
STABLE
Oscillator Input Stable. This bit indicates if the OSCIN/CLKIN input has stabilized.
0 – OSCIN/CLKIN input not yet stable. Oscillator counter is not finished counting (default).
1 – OSCIN/CLKIN input stable.
5:4
Reserved
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
3
PLLRST
Asserts RESET to PLL
0 – PLL Reset Released.
1 – PLL Reset Asserted (default).
2
Reserved
Reserved. The user must write a “0” to this bit.
1
PLLPWRDN
0
52
PLLEN
DESCRIPTION
Select PLL Power Down
0 – PLL Operational (default).
1 – PLL Placed in Power-Down State.
PLL Mode Enable
0 – Bypass Mode (default). PLL disabled.
Divider D0 and PLL are bypassed. SYSCLK1/SYSCLK2/SYSCLK3 are divided down
directly from input reference clock.
1 – PLL Enabled.
Divider D0 and PLL are not bypassed. SYSCLK1/SYSCLK2/SYSCLK3 are divided down
from PLL output.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/C6711D only] (continued)
PLLM Register (0x01B7 C110)
24 23
28 27
31
20 19
16
Reserved
R−0
15
12 11
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Reserved
PLLM
R−0
R/W−0 0111
1
0
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
Table 35. PLL Multiplier Control Register (PLLM)
BIT #
NAME
31:5
Reserved
4:0
PLLM
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
PLL multiply mode [default is x7 (0 0111)].
00000 =
Reserved
10000 =
00001 =
Reserved
10001 =
00010 =
Reserved
10010 =
00011 =
Reserved
10011 =
00100 =
x4
10100 =
00101 =
x5
10101 =
00110 =
x6
10110 =
00111 =
x7
10111 =
01000 =
x8
11000 =
01001 =
x9
11001 =
01010 =
x10
11010 =
01011 =
x11
11011 =
01100 =
x12
11100 =
01101 =
x13
11101 =
01110 =
x14
11110 =
01111 =
x15
11111 =
x16
x17
x18
x19
x20
x21
x22
x23
x24
x25
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PLLM select values 00000 through 00011 and 11010 through 11111 are not supported.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
53
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/6711D only] (continued)
PLLDIV0, PLLDIV1, PLLDIV2, and PLLDIV3 Registers
(0x01B7 C114, 0x01B7 C118, 0x01B7 C11C, and 0x01B7 C120, respectively)
28
31
24
27
23
20 19
16
Reserved
R−0
14
15
12
11
8
7
5
4
3
2
DxEN
Reserved
PLLDIVx
R/W−1
R−0
R/W−x xxxx†
1
0
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
† Default values for the PLLDIV0, PLLDIV1, PLLDIV2, and PLLDIV3 bits are /1 (0 0000), /1 (0 0000), /2 (0 0001), and /2 (0 0001), respectively.
CAUTION:
D1, and D2 should never be disabled. D3 should only be disabled if ECLKIN is used.
Table 36. PLL Wrapper Divider x Registers (Prescaler Divider D0 and Post-Scaler Dividers D1,
D2, and D3)‡
BIT #
NAME
31:16
Reserved
15
DxEN
14:5
Reserved
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Divider Dx Enable (where x denotes 0 through 3).
0 – Divider x Disabled. No clock output.
1 – Divider x Enabled (default).
These divider-enable bits are device-specific and must be set to 1 to enable.
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
PLL Divider Ratio [Default values for the PLLDIV0, PLLDIV1, PLLDIV2, and PLLDIV3 bits are /1, /1,
/2, and /2, respectively].
4:0
PLLDIVx
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
/1
/2
/3
/4
/5
/6
/7
/8
/9
/10
/11
/12
/13
/14
/15
/16
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001
11010
11011
11100
11101
11110
11111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
/17
/18
/19
/20
/21
/22
/23
/24
/25
/26
/27
/28
/29
/30
/31
/32
‡ Note that SYSCLK2 must run at half the rate of SYSCLK1. Therefore, the divider ratio of D2 must be two times slower than D1. For example,
if D1 is set to /2, then D2 must be set to /4.
54
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/C6711D only] (continued)
OSCDIV1 Register (0x01B7 C124)
24 23
28 27
31
20 19
16
Reserved
R−0
15
14
12 11
8
7
5
4
3
2
OD1EN
Reserved
OSCDIV1
R/W−1
R−0
R/W−0 0111
1
0
Legend: R = Read only, R/W = Read/Write; -n = value after reset
The OSCDIV1 register controls the oscillator divider 1 for CLKOUT3. The CLKOUT3 signal does not go through
the PLL path.
Table 37. Oscillator Divider 1 Register (OSCDIV1)
BIT #
NAME
31:16
Reserved
15
OD1EN
14:5
Reserved
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Oscillator Divider 1 Enable.
0 – Oscillator Divider 1 Disabled.
1 – Oscillator Divider 1 Enabled (default).
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.
Oscillator Divider 1 Ratio [default is /8 (0 0111)].
4:0
OSCDIV1
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
/1
/2
/3
/4
/5
/6
/7
/8
/9
/10
/11
/12
/13
/14
/15
/16
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001
11010
11011
11100
11101
11110
11111
•
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
/17
/18
/19
/20
/21
/22
/23
/24
/25
/26
/27
/28
/29
/30
/31
/32
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
55
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
general-purpose input/output (GPIO) [11C/11D only]
To use the GP[7:4, 2] software-configurable GPIO pins, the GPxEN bits in the GP Enable (GPEN) Register and
the GPxDIR bits in the GP Direction (GPDIR) Register must be properly configured.
GPxEN =
1
GP[x] pin is enabled
GPxDIR =
0
GP[x] pin is an input
GPxDIR =
1
GP[x] pin is an output
where “x” represents one of the 7 through 4, or 2 GPIO pins
Figure 11 shows the GPIO enable bits in the GPEN register for the C6711C/C6711D device. To use any of the
GPx pins as general-purpose input/output functions, the corresponding GPxEN bit must be set to “1” (enabled).
Default values are device-specific, so refer to Figure 11 for the C6711C/C6711D default configuration.
31
24 23
16
Reserved
R-0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Reserved
GP7
EN
GP6
EN
GP5
EN
GP4
EN
—
GP2
EN
1
0
—
—
R/W-0
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset
Figure 11. GPIO Enable Register (GPEN) [Hex Address: 01B0 0000]
Figure 12 shows the GPIO direction bits in the GPDIR register. This register determines if a given GPIO pin is
an input or an output providing the corresponding GPxEN bit is enabled (set to “1”) in the GPEN register. By
default, all the GPIO pins are configured as input pins.
31
24 23
16
Reserved
R-0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GP7
DIR
GP6
DIR
GP5
DIR
GP4
DIR
—
GP2
DIR
—
—
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
Reserved
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset
Figure 12. GPIO Direction Register (GPDIR) [Hex Address: 01B0 0004]
For more detailed information on general-purpose inputs/outputs (GPIOs), see the TMS320C6000 DSP
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU584).
56
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
power-down mode logic
Figure 13 shows the power-down mode logic on the C6711/11B/11C/11D.
CLKOUT1‡
CLKOUT2
Internal Clock Tree
Clock
Distribution
and Dividers
PD1
PD2
PowerDown
Logic
Clock
PLL
IFR
Internal
Peripherals
IER
PWRD CSR
CPU
PD3
320C6711/11B/11C/11D
CLKIN
RESET
† External input clocks, with the exception of CLKOUT3 [11C/11D only] and CLKIN, are not gated by the power-down mode logic.
‡ CLKOUT1 is applicable on the C6711 and C6711B devices only.
Figure 13. Power-Down Mode Logic†
triggering, wake-up, and effects
The power-down modes and their wake-up methods are programmed by setting the PWRD field (bits 15−10)
of the control status register (CSR). The PWRD field of the CSR is shown in Figure 14 and described in Table 38.
When writing to the CSR, all bits of the PWRD field should be set at the same time. Logic 0 should be used when
“writing” to the reserved bit (bit 15) of the PWRD field. The CSR is discussed in detail in the TMS320C6000 CPU
and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
57
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
31
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Reserved
Enable or
Non-Enabled
Interrupt Wake
Enabled
Interrupt Wake
PD3
PD2
PD1
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
7
9
8
0
Legend: R/W−x = Read/write reset value
NOTE: The shadowed bits are not part of the power-down logic discussion and therefore are not covered here. For information on these other
bit fields in the CSR register, see the TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).
Figure 14. PWRD Field of the CSR Register
A delay of up to nine clock cycles may occur after the instruction that sets the PWRD bits in the CSR before the
PD mode takes effect. As best practice, NOPs should be padded after the PWRD bits are set in the CSR to account
for this delay.
If PD1 mode is terminated by a non-enabled interrupt, the program execution returns to the instruction where PD1
took effect. If PD1 mode is terminated by an enabled interrupt, the interrupt service routine will be executed first,
then the program execution returns to the instruction where PD1 took effect. In the case with an enabled interrupt,
the GIE bit in the CSR and the NMIE bit in the interrupt enable register (IER) must also be set in order for the
interrupt service routine to execute; otherwise, execution returns to the instruction where PD1 took effect upon
PD1 mode termination by an enabled interrupt.
PD2 and PD3 modes can only be aborted by device reset. Table 38 summarizes all the power-down modes.
58
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
Table 38. Characteristics of the Power-Down Modes
PRWD FIELD
(BITS 15−10)
POWER-DOWN
MODE
WAKE-UP METHOD
000000
No power-down
—
EFFECT ON CHIP’S OPERATION
—
001001
PD1
Wake by an enabled interrupt
010001
PD1
Wake by an enabled or
non-enabled interrupt
011010
011100
PD2†
PD3†
CPU halted (except for the interrupt logic)
Power-down mode blocks the internal clock inputs at the
boundary of the CPU, preventing most of the CPU logic from
switching. During PD1, EDMA transactions can proceed
between peripherals and internal memory.
Wake by a device reset
Output clock from PLL is halted, stopping the internal clock
structure from switching and resulting in the entire chip being
halted. All register and internal RAM contents are preserved. All
functional I/O “freeze” in the last state when the PLL clock is
turned off.
Wake by a device reset
Input clock to the PLL stops generating clocks. All register and
internal RAM contents are preserved. All functional I/O “freeze” in
the last state when the PLL clock is turned off. Following reset, the
PLL needs time to re-lock, just as it does following power-up.
Wake-up from PD3 takes longer than wake-up from PD2 because
the PLL needs to be re-locked, just as it does following power-up.
All others
Reserved
—
—
† When entering PD2 and PD3, all functional I/O remains in the previous state. However, for peripherals which are asynchronous in nature or
peripherals with an external clock source, output signals may transition in response to stimulus on the inputs. Under these conditions,
peripherals will not operate according to specifications.
On C6711D silicon revision 2.0 and C6711C silicon revision 1.1, the device includes a programmable PLL which
allows software control of PLL bypass via the PLLEN bit in the PLLCSR register. With this enhanced functionality
come some additional considerations when entering power-down modes.
The power-down modes (PD2 and PD3) function by disabling the PLL to stop clocks to the device. However,
if the PLL is bypassed (PLLEN = 0), the device will still receive clocks from the external clock input (CLKIN).
Therefore, bypassing the PLL makes the power-down modes PD2 and PD3 ineffective.
Make sure that the PLL is enabled by writing a “1” to PLLEN bit (PLLCSR.0) before writing to either PD3
(CSR.11) or PD2 (CSR.10) to enter a power-down mode.
power-supply sequencing
TI DSPs do not require specific power sequencing between the core supply and the I/O supply. However,
systems should be designed to ensure that neither supply is powered up for extended periods of time
(>1 second) if the other supply is below the proper operating voltage.
system-level design considerations
System-level design considerations, such as bus contention, may require supply sequencing to be
implemented. In this case, for C6711/11B, the core supply should be powered up at the same time as, or prior
to (and powered down after) the I/O buffers. For C6711C/11D, the core supply should be powered up prior to
(and powered down after) the I/O buffers. This is to ensure that the I/O buffers receive valid inputs from the core
before the output buffers are powered up, thus, preventing bus contention with other chips on the board.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
59
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
power-supply design considerations
A dual-power supply with simultaneous sequencing can be used to eliminate the delay between core and I/O
power up. A Schottky diode can also be used to tie the core rail to the I/O rail (see Figure 15).
I/O Supply
DVDD
Schottky
Diode
C6000
DSP
Core Supply
CVDD
VSS
GND
Figure 15. Schottky Diode Diagram
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DSP (or DSP array) to minimize
inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance
applications utilizing the C6000 platform of DSPs, the PC board should include separate power planes for
core, I/O, and ground, all bypassed with high-quality low-ESL/ESR capacitors.
C6711/11B device applicable only
On systems using C62x and C67x DSPs, like the C6711/C6711B device, the core may consume in excess of
2 A per DSP until the I/O supply powers on. This extra current results from uninitialized logic within the DSP(s).
A normal current state returns once the I/O power supply turns on and the CPU sees a clock pulse. Decreasing
the amount of time between the core supply power-up and the I/O supply power-up reduces the effects of the
current draw. If the external supply to the DSP core cannot supply the excess current, the minimum core voltage
may not be achieved until after normal current returns. This voltage starvation of the core supply during power
up will not affect run-time operation. Voltage starvation can affect power supply systems that gate the I/O supply
via the core supply, causing the I/O supply to never turn on. During the transition from excess to normal current,
a voltage spike may be seen on the core supply. Care must be taken when designing overvoltage protection
circuitry on the core supply to not restart the power sequence due to this spike. Otherwise, the supply may cycle
indefinitely.
60
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
power-supply decoupling
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors (caps) as possible
close to the DSP. Assuming 0603 caps, the user should be able to fit a total of 60 caps — 30 for the core supply
and 30 for the I/O supply. These caps need to be close (no more than 1.25 cm maximum distance) to the DSP
to be effective. Physically smaller caps are better, such as 0402, but the size needs to be evaluated from a
yield/manufacturing point-of-view. Parasitic inductance limits the effectiveness of the decoupling capacitors,
therefore physically smaller capacitors should be used while maintaining the largest available capacitance
value. As with the selection of any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product’s production
lifetime needs to be considered.
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement
The TMS320C6711/11B/11C/11D DSP requires that both TRST and RESET resets be asserted upon power
up to be properly initialized. While RESET initializes the DSP core, TRST initializes the DSP emulation logic.
Both resets are required for proper operation.
While both TRST and RESET need to be asserted upon power up, only RESET needs to be released for the
DSP to boot properly. TRST may be asserted indefinitely for normal operation, keeping the JTAG port interface
and DSP emulation logic in the reset state.
TRST only needs to be released when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the DSP or exercise
the DSP boundary scan functionality.
For maximum reliability, the TMS320C6711/11B/11C/11D DSP includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST
pin to ensure that TRST will always be asserted upon power up and the DSP internal emulation logic will always
be properly initialized.
JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some third-party JTAG controllers
may not drive TRST high but expect the use of an external pullup resistor on TRST.
When using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to initialize the DSP after power up and externally drive
TRST high before attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations. Following the release of RESET, the
low-to-high transition of TRST must be “seen” to latch the state of EMU1 and EMU0. The EMU[1:0] pins
configure the device for either Boundary Scan mode or Emulation mode. For more detailed information, see
the terminal functions section of this data sheet.
EMIF device speed (C6711/C6711B)
TI recommends utilizing I/O buffer information specification (IBIS) to analyze all AC timings to determine if the
maximum EMIF speed is achievable for a given board layout. To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate
timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature
number SPRA839).
To maintain signal integrity, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines (see
the Terminal Functions table for the EMIF output signals).
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
61
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
EMIF device speed (C6711C/C6711D only)
The maximum EMIF speed on the C6711C/C6711D device is 100 MHz. TI recommends utilizing I/O buffer
information specification (IBIS) to analyze all AC timings to determine if the maximum EMIF speed is achievable
for a given board layout. To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see
the Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839).
For ease of design evaluation, Table 39 contains IBIS simulation results showing the maximum EMIF-SDRAM
interface speeds for the given example boards (TYPE) and SDRAM speed grades. Timing analysis should be
performed to verify that all AC timings are met for the specified board layout. Other configurations are also
possible, but again, timing analysis must be done to verify proper AC timings.
To maintain signal integrity, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines (see
the Terminal Functions table for the EMIF output signals).
Table 39. C6711C/C6711D Example Boards and Maximum EMIF Speed
BOARD CONFIGURATION
TYPE
1-Load
Short Traces
2-Loads
Short Traces
3-Loads
Short Traces
3-Loads
Long Traces
EMIF INTERFACE
COMPONENTS
One bank of one
32-Bit SDRAM
One bank of two
16-Bit SDRAMs
One bank of two
32-Bit SDRAMs
One bank of buffer
One bank of one
32-Bit SDRAM
One bank of one
32-Bit SBSRAM
One bank of buffer
SDRAM SPEED GRADE
BOARD TRACE
1 to 3-inch traces with proper
termination resistors;
Trace impedance ~ 50 Ω
1.2 to 3 inches from EMIF to
each load, with proper
termination resistors;
Trace impedance ~ 78 Ω
1.2 to 3 inches from EMIF to
each load, with proper
termination resistors;
Trace impedance ~ 78 Ω
4 to 7 inches from EMIF;
Trace impedance ~ 63 Ω
MAXIMUM ACHIEVABLE
EMIF-SDRAM
INTERFACE SPEED
143 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−7)
100 MHz
166 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−6)
200 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−5)
For short traces, SDRAM data
output hold time on these
SDRAM speed grades cannot
meet EMIF input hold time
requirement (see NOTE 1).
125 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−8E)
100 MHz
133 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−75)
100 MHz
143 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−7E)
100 MHz
167 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−6A)
100 MHz
167 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−6)
100 MHz
125 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−8E)
For short traces, EMIF cannot
meet SDRAM input hold
requirement (see NOTE 1).
133 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−75)
100 MHz
143 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−7E)
100 MHz
167 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−6A)
100 MHz
167 MHz 16-bit SDRAM (−6)
For short traces, EMIF cannot
meet SDRAM input hold
requirement (see NOTE 1).
143 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−7)
83 MHz
166 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−6)
83 MHz
183 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−55)
83 MHz
200 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−5)
SDRAM data output hold time
cannot meet EMIF input hold
requirement (see NOTE 1).
183 MHz 32-bit SDRAM (−55)
NOTE 1: Results are based on IBIS simulations for the given example boards (TYPE). Timing analysis should be performed to determine if timing
requirements can be met for the particular system.
62
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
EMIF big endian mode correctness [C6711D only]
The HD8 pin device endian mode (LENDIAN) selects the endian mode of operation (Little or Big Endian). For
the C6711C/11D device Little Endian is the default setting.
The C6711D HD12 pin (EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness) [EMIFBE] enhancement allows the flexibility to
change the EMIF data placement on the EMIF bus.
When using the default setting of HD12 = 1 for the C6711D, the EMIF will present 8-bit and 16-bit data on the
ED[7:0] side of the bus if using Little Endian mode (HD8 = 1) and to the ED[31:24] side of the bus if using Big
Endian mode. Figure 16 shows the mapping of 16-bit and 8-bit C6711D devices with EMIF endianness
correction.
EMIF DATA LINES (PINS) WHERE DATA PRESENT
ED[31:24] (BE3)
ED[23:16] (BE2)
ED[15:8] (BE1)
ED[7:0] (BE0)
32-Bit Device in ??? Endianness Mode
16-Bit Device in Big Endianness Mode
16-Bit Device in Little Endianness Mode
8-Bit Device in Big
Endianness Mode
8-Bit Device in Little Endianness Mode
Figure 16. 16/8-Bit EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness Mapping (HD12 = 1) [C6711D Only]
When HD12 = 0 for the C6711D, enabling EMIF endianness correction, the EMIF will present 8-bit and 16-bit
data on the ED[7:0] side of the bus, regardless of the endianess mode (see Figure 17).
EMIF DATA LINES (PINS) WHERE DATA PRESENT
ED[31:24] (BE3)
ED[23:16] (BE2)
ED[15:8] (BE1)
ED[7:0] (BE0)
32-Bit Device in ??? Endianness Mode
16-Bit Device in Any Endianness Mode
8-Bit Device in Any Endianness Mode
Figure 17. 16/8-Bit EMIF Big Endian Mode Correctness Mapping (HD12 = 0) [C6711D Only]
This new C6711D endianness correction functionality does not affect systems using the default value of
HD12=1.
This new feature does not affect systems operating in Little Endian mode.
bootmode
The C67x device resets using the active-low signal RESET and the internal reset signal (C6711C/C6711D;
for the C6711/C6711B device, the RESET signal is the same as the internal reset signal). While RESET is low,
the internal reset is also asserted and the device is held in reset and is initialized to the prescribed reset state.
Refer to reset timing for reset timing characteristics and states of device pins during reset. The release of the
internal reset signal (see the Reset Phase 3 discussion in the Reset Timing section of this data sheet) starts
the processor running with the prescribed device configuration and boot mode.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
63
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
The C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D has three types of boot modes:
D Host boot
If host boot is selected, upon release of internal reset, the CPU is internally “stalled” while the remainder of
the device is released. During this period, an external host can initialize the CPU memory space as
necessary through the host interface, including internal configuration registers, such as those that control
the EMIF or other peripherals. Once the host is finished with all necessary initialization, it must set the
DSPINT bit in the HPIC register to complete the boot process. This transition causes the boot configuration
logic to bring the CPU out of the “stalled” state. The CPU then begins execution from address 0. The DSPINT
condition is not latched by the CPU, because it occurs while the CPU is still internally “stalled”. Also, DSPINT
brings the CPU out of the “stalled” state only if the host boot process is selected. All memory may be written
to and read by the host. This allows for the host to verify what it sends to the DSP if required. After the CPU is
out of the “stalled” state, the CPU needs to clear the DSPINT, otherwise, no more DSPINTs can be received.
D Emulation boot
Emulation boot mode is a variation of host boot. In this mode, it is not necessary for a host to load code or to
set DSPINT to release the CPU from the “stalled” state. Instead, the emulator will set DSPINT if it has not
been previously set so that the CPU can begin executing code from address 0. Prior to beginning execution,
the emulator sets a breakpoint at address 0. This prevents the execution of invalid code by halting the CPU
prior to executing the first instruction. Emulation boot is a good tool in the debug phase of development.
D EMIF boot (using default ROM timings)
Upon the release of internal reset, the 1K-Byte ROM code located in the beginning of CE1 is copied to
address 0 by the EDMA using the default ROM timings, while the CPU is internally “stalled”. The data should
be stored in the endian format that the system is using. The boot process also lets you choose the width of
the ROM. In this case, the EMIF automatically assembles consecutive 8-bit bytes or 16-bit half-words to
form the 32-bit instruction words to be copied. The transfer is automatically done by the EDMA as a
single-frame block transfer from the ROM to address 0. After completion of the block transfer, the CPU is
released from the “stalled” state and start running from address 0.
absolute maximum ratings over operating case temperature range (unless otherwise noted)†
Supply voltage range, CVDD (see Note 2): (C6711C/C6711D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 0.3 V to 1.8 V
(C6711/C6711B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 0.3 V to 2.3 V
Supply voltage range, DVDD (see Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V
Input voltage ranges: (C6711C/C6711D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to DVDD + 0.5 V
(C6711/C6711B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V
Output voltage ranges: (C6711C/C6711D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to DVDD + 0.5 V
(C6711/C6711B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V
Operating case temperature ranges, TC: (default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0_C to 90_C
(A version) [C6711BGFNA and C6711CGDPA] −40_C to105_C
Storage temperature range, Tstg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −65_C to 150_C
† Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and
functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not
implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
NOTE 2: All voltage values are with respect to VSS.
64
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
recommended operating conditions‡
(C6711D−250 only)
(C6711C/C6711D only)
CVDD
Supply voltage, Core
(C6711B and C6711-100)
(C6711-150 only)
DVDD
Supply voltage, I/O
VSS
Supply ground
VIH
High-level input voltage
(C6711C/C6711D only)
VIL
NOM
MAX
UNIT
1.33
1.14§
1.4
1.20§
1.47
V
1.32
V
1.71
1.8
1.89
V
1.8
1.9
2
V
(C6711C/C6711D only)
3.13
3.3
3.47
V
(C6711 and C6711B)
3.14
3.3
3.46
V
0
0
0
V
All signals except CLKS1, DR1, and RESET
2
CLKS1, DR1, and RESET
2
High-level input voltage (C6711/11B)
Low-level input voltage
(C6711C/C6711D only)
MIN
All signals except CLKS1, DR1, and RESET
0.8
CLKS1, DR1, and RESET
0.3*DVDD
0.8
Low-level input voltage (C6711/11B)
High-level output current
(C6711/11B)
IOH
High-level output current
(C6711C)¶
High-level output current
(C6711D)§
Low-level output current
(C6711/11B)
IOL
Low-level output current
(C6711C)§
Low-level output current
(C6711D)§
All signals except CLKOUT1, CLKOUT2, and ECLKOUT
–4
CLKOUT1, CLKOUT2, and ECLKOUT
–8
All signals except ECLKOUT, CLKOUT2, CLKOUT3,
CLKS1, and DR1
–8
ECLKOUT, CLKOUT2, and CLKOUT3
–8
ECLKOUT and CLKOUT2
mA
mA
–16
All signals except CLKOUT1, CLKOUT2, and ECLKOUT
4
CLKOUT1, CLKOUT2, and ECLKOUT
8
All signals except ECLKOUT, CLKOUT2, CLKOUT3,
CLKS1, and DR1
8
ECLKOUT, CLKOUT2, and CLKOUT3
mA
mA
16
CLKS1 and DR1
3
mA
All signals except ECLKOUT, CLKOUT2, CLKS1, and
DR1
8
mA
16
mA
3
mA
ECLKOUT and CLKOUT2
Default
Operating case
temperature
V
–16
All signals except ECLKOUT, CLKOUT2, CLKS1, and
DR1
CLKS1 and DR1
TC
V
2
0
90
A version
–40
105
I version
–40
85
_C
C
‡ For the C6711/11B device, the core supply should be powered up at the same time as, or prior to (and powered down after), the I/O supply. For
the C6711C/11D device, the core supply should be powered up prior to (and powered down after), the I/O supply. Systems should be designed
to ensure that neither supply is powered up for an extended period of time if the other supply is below the proper operating voltage.
§ These values are compatible with existing 1.26V designs.
¶ Refers to DC (or steady state) currents only, actual switching currents are higher. For more details, see the device-specific IBIS models.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
65
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating case
temperature† (unless otherwise noted) for C6711/C6711B only
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
VOH
High-level output
voltage (C6711/11B)
All signals
DVDD = MIN, IOH = MAX
VOL
Low-level output
voltage (C6711/11B)
All signals
DVDD = MIN,
IOL = MAX
II
Input current
All signals
IOZ
Off-state output
current
All signals
IDD2V
IDD2V
IDD3V
Ci
Supply current, CPU + CPU memory access‡
Supply current, peripherals‡
Supply current, I/O pins‡
Input capacitance
MIN
TYP
MAX
2.4
UNIT
V
0.4
V
VI = VSS to DVDD
±150
uA
VO = DVDD or 0 V
±10
uA
C6711, CVDD = NOM,
CPU clock = 150 MHz
433
C6711B, CVDD = NOM,
CPU clock = 150 MHz
410
C6711, CVDD = NOM,
CPU clock = 150 MHz
232
mA
C6711B, CVDD = NOM,
CPU clock = 150 MHz
220
mA
C6711, DVDD = NOM,
CPU clock = 150 MHz
60
mA
C6711B, DVDD = NOM,
CPU clock = 150 MHz
60
mA
(C6711/11B)
mA
7
pF
Co
Output capacitance
(C6711/11B)
7
pF
† For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
‡ For the C6711/11B device, these currents were measured with average activity (50% high/50% low power). For more details on CPU, peripheral,
and I/O activity, see the TMS320C62x/C67x Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA486).
66
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating case
temperature† (unless otherwise noted) for C6711C/C6711D only
PARAMETER
VOH
High-level output
voltage (C6711C/11D)
VOL
Low-level output
voltage (C6711C/11D)
II
Input current
TEST CONDITIONS
All signals except CLKS1 and
DR1
DVDD = MIN, IOH = MAX
All signals except CLKS1 and
DR1
MIN
TYP
2.4
IDD2V
IDD2V
IDD2V
Off-state output
current
0.4
DVDD = MIN, IOL = MAX
CLKS1 and DR1
C6711C/11D: All signals except
CLKS1 and DR1
VI = VSS to DVDD
C6711C/11D: All signals except
CLKS1 and DR1
VO = DVDD or 0 V
C6711C/11D: CLKS1 and DR1
Core supply current‡
Core supply current‡
I/O supply current‡
Ci
Input capacitance
V
0.4
Core supply current‡
IDD3V
UNIT
V
C6711C/11D: CLKS1 and DR1
IOZ
MAX
C6711D, CVDD = 1.4 V,
CPU clock = 250 MHz
810
C6711C, CVDD = 1.26 V,
CPU clock = 200 MHz
560
C6711D, CVDD = 1.26 V,
CPU clock = 200 MHz
560
C6711C, CVDD = 1.26 V,
CPU clock = 167 MHz
475
C6711D, CVDD = 1.26 V,
CPU clock = 167 MHz
475
11C/11D, DVDD = 3.3 V,
EMIF speed = 100 MHz
75
(C6711C/11D)
±170
uA
±10
uA
±170
uA
±10
uA
mA
mA
mA
mA
7
pF
Co
Output capacitance
(C6711C/11D)
7
pF
† For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
‡ For the C6711C/C6711D device, these currents were measured with average activity (50% high/50% low power) at 25°C case temperature and
100-MHz EMIF. This model represents a device performing high-DSP-activity operations 50% of the time, and the remainder performing
low-DSP-activity operations. The high/low-DSP-activity models are defined as follows:
High-DSP-Activity Model:
CPU: 8 instructions/cycle with 2 LDDW instructions [L1 Data Memory: 128 bits/cycle via LDDW instructions;
L1 Program Memory: 256 bits/cycle; L2/EMIF EDMA: 50% writes, 50% reads to/from SDRAM (50% bit-switching)]
McBSP: 2 channels at E1 rate
Timers: 2 timers at maximum rate
Low-DSP-Activity Model:
CPU: 2 instructions/cycle with 1 LDH instruction [L1 Data Memory: 16 bits/cycle; L1 Program Memory: 256 bits per 4 cycles;
L2/EMIF EDMA: None]
McBSP: 2 channels at E1 rate
Timers: 2 timers at maximum rate
The actual current draw is highly application-dependent. For more details on core and I/O activity, refer to the TMS320C6713/12C/11C Power
Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA889).
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
67
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION
IOL
Tester Pin
Electronics
50 Ω
Vcomm
Output
Under
Test
CT
IOH
Where:
IOL
IOH
Vcomm
CT
=
=
=
=
2 mA
2 mA
0.8 V
10−15-pF typical load-circuit capacitance
Figure 18. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements for C6711/C6711B Only
Tester Pin Electronics
42 Ω
3.5 nH
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see note)
4.0 pF
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
Output
Under
Test
Device Pin
(see note)
1.85 pF
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects
must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect.
The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from
the data sheet timings.
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.
Figure 19. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements for C6711C/C6711D Only
68
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION (CONTINUED)
signal transition levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to 1.5 V for both “0” and “1” logic levels.
Vref = 1.5 V
Figure 20. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks, and
VOL MAX and VOH MIN for output clocks.
Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN)
Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX)
Figure 21. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
timing parameters and board routing analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data sheet do not include delays by board routings. As a good
board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be adjusted by
increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer information specification
(IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate
timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature
number SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as buffers may be used to compensate any timing
differences.
For example:
D In typical boards with the C6711B commercial temperature device, the routing delay improves the external
memory’s ability to meet the DSP EMIF data input hold time requirement [th(EKOH-EDV)].
D In some boards with the C6711BGFNA extended temperature device, the routing delay improves the
external memory’s ability to meet the DSP EMIF data input hold time requirement [th(EKOH-EDV)]. In addition,
it may be necessary to add an extra delay to the input clock of the external memory to robustly meet the
DSP data input hold time requirement. If the extra delay approach is used, memory bus frequency
adjustments may be needed to ensure the DSP input setup time requirement [tsu(EDV-EKOH)] is still
maintained.
For inputs, timing is most impacted by the round-trip propagation delay from the DSP to the external device and
from the external device to the DSP. This round-trip delay tends to negatively impact the input setup time margin,
but also tends to improve the input hold time margins (see Table 40 and Figure 22).
Figure 22 represents a general transfer between the DSP and an external device. The figure also represents
board route delays and how they are perceived by the DSP and the external device.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
69
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION (CONTINUED)
Table 40. Board-Level Timings Example (see Figure 22)
NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
Clock route delay
2
Minimum DSP hold time
3
Minimum DSP setup time
4
External device hold time requirement
5
External device setup time requirement
6
Control signal route delay
7
External device hold time
8
External device access time
9
DSP hold time requirement
10
DSP setup time requirement
11
Data route delay
ECLKOUT
(Output from DSP)
1
ECLKOUT
(Input to External Device)
Control Signals†
(Output from DSP)
2
3
4
5
Control Signals
(Input to External Device)
6
7
8
Data Signals‡
(Output from External Device)
10
9
11
Data Signals‡
(Input to DSP)
† Control signals include data for Writes.
‡ Data signals are generated during Reads from an external device.
Figure 22. Board-Level Input/Output Timings
70
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS
timing requirements for CLKIN†‡ (see Figure 23) [C6711/11B]
–100
CLKMODE = x4
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
–150
CLKMODE = x1
MAX
MIN
CLKMODE = x4
MAX
MIN
CLKMODE = x1
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
tc(CLKIN)
tw(CLKINH)
Cycle time, CLKIN
40
10
26.7
6.7
ns
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.4C
0.45C
0.4C
0.45C
ns
tw(CLKINL)
tt(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.4C
0.45C
0.4C
0.45C
ns
4
Transition time, CLKIN
5
1
5
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
‡ C = CLKIN cycle time in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKIN frequency is 40 MHz, use C = 25 ns.
1
ns
timing requirements for CLKIN†‡§ (see Figure 23) [C6711C/11D]
GDPA-167
PLL MODE
(PLLEN = 1)
NO.
1
2
3
–200
BYPASS MODE
(PLLEN = 0)
MIN
MAX
6
83.3
MIN
MAX
PLL MODE
(PLLEN = 1)
BYPASS MODE
(PLLEN = 0)
MIN
MAX
83.3
MIN
UNIT
MAX
tc(CLKIN)
tw(CLKINH)
Cycle time, CLKIN
6
5
5
ns
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
ns
tw(CLKINL)
tt(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
0.4C
ns
4
Transition time, CLKIN
5
5
5
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
‡ C = CLKIN cycle time in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKIN frequency is 40 MHz, use C = 25 ns.
§ See the PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/C6711D only] section of this data sheet.
5
ns
timing requirements for CLKIN†‡§ (see Figure 23) [C6711D−250]
–250
PLL MODE
(PLLEN = 1)
NO.
1
2
3
4
BYPASS MODE
(PLLEN = 0)
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
4
83.3
4
ns
0.4C
ns
tc(CLKIN)
tw(CLKINH)
Cycle time, CLKIN
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.4C
tw(CLKINL)
tt(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.4C
Transition time, CLKIN
MAX
0.4C
5
ns
5
ns
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
‡ C = CLKIN cycle time in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKIN frequency is 40 MHz, use C = 25 ns.
§ See the PLL and PLL controller [C6711C/C6711D only] section of this data sheet.
1
4
2
CLKIN
3
4
Figure 23. CLKIN Timings
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
71
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT1†‡§
(see Figure 24) [C6711/11B only]
–100
–150
NO.
PARAMETER
CLKMODE = x4
MIN
1
2
3
4
tc(CKO1)
tw(CKO1H)
Cycle time, CLKOUT1
tw(CKO1L)
tt(CKO1)
UNIT
CLKMODE = x1
MAX
MIN
MAX
P − 0.7
P + 0.7
P − 0.7
P + 0.7
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT1 high
(P/2) − 0.7
(P/2 ) + 0.7
PH − 0.7
PH + 0.7
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT1 low
(P/2) − 0.7
(P/2 ) + 0.7
PL − 0.7
PL + 0.7
ns
2
ns
Transition time, CLKOUT1
2
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)
§ PH is the high period of CLKIN in ns and PL is the low period of CLKIN in ns.
1
4
2
CLKOUT1
3
4
Figure 24. CLKOUT1 Timings [C6711/11B Only]
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT2†‡ (see Figure 25)
[C6711/11B]
NO.
1
2
3
4
–100
–150
PARAMETER
MAX
tc(CKO2)
tw(CKO2H)
Cycle time, CLKOUT2
2P − 0.7
2P + 0.7
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 high
P − 0.7
P + 0.7
ns
tw(CKO2L)
tt(CKO2)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 low
P − 0.7
P + 0.7
ns
2
ns
Transition time, CLKOUT2
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)
1
4
2
CLKOUT2
3
4
Figure 25. CLKOUT2 Timings [C6711/11B]
72
UNIT
MIN
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT2†‡
(see Figure 25) [C6711C/C6711D]
NO.
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
3
4
tc(CKO2)
tw(CKO2H)
Cycle time, CLKOUT2
tw(CKO2L)
tt(CKO2)
UNIT
MAX
C2 − 0.8
C2 + 0.8
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 high
(C2/2) − 0.8
(C2/2) + 0.8
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 low
(C2/2) − 0.8
(C2/2) + 0.8
ns
Transition time, CLKOUT2
2
ns
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ C2 = CLKOUT2 period in ns. CLKOUT2 period is determined by the PLL controller output SYSCLK2 period, which must be set to CPU period
divide-by-2.
1
4
2
CLKOUT2
3
4
Figure 26. CLKOUT2 Timings
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT3†§
(see Figure 27) [C6711C/C6711D only]
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
3
4
11DGDPA-167
11D−200
−250 (6711D)
11CGDPA-167
11C−200
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
tc(CKO3)
tw(CKO3H)
Cycle time, CLKOUT3
C3 − 0.6
C3 + 0.6
C3 − 0.9
C3 + 0.9
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT3 high
(C3/2) − 0.6
(C3/2) + 0.6
(C3/2) − 0.9
(C3/2) + 0.9
ns
tw(CKO3L)
tt(CKO3)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT3 low
(C3/2) − 0.6
(C3/2) + 0.6
(C3/2) − 0.9
(C3/2) + 0.9
ns
3
ns
Transition time, CLKOUT3
2
5
td(CLKINH-CKO3V) Delay time, CLKIN high to CLKOUT3 valid
1.5
6.5
1.5
7.5
ns
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ C3 = CLKOUT3 period in ns. CLKOUT3 period is a divide-down of the CPU clock, configurable via the RATIO field in the PLLDIV3 register.
CLKIN
5
1
5
4
3
CLKOUT3
2
4
NOTE A: For this example, the CLKOUT3 frequency is CLKIN divide-by-2.
Figure 27. CLKOUT3 Timings [C6711C/C6711D Only]
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
73
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for ECLKIN† (see Figure 28)
–100
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
4
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
–150
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
tc(EKI)
tw(EKIH)
Cycle time, ECLKIN
15
10
10
ns
Pulse duration, ECLKIN high
6.8
4.5
4.5
ns
tw(EKIL)
tt(EKI)
Pulse duration, ECLKIN low
6.8
4.5
4.5
Transition time, ECLKIN
2.2
ns
2.2
3
ns
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
1
4
2
ECLKIN
3
4
Figure 28. ECLKIN Timings
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for ECLKOUTद
(see Figure 29)
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
–100
–150
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
E − 0.7
E + 0.7
E − 0.9
E + 0.9
ns
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT high
EH − 0.7
EH + 0.7
EH − 0.9
EH + 0.9
ns
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT low
EL − 0.7
EL + 0.7
EL − 0.9
EL + 0.9
ns
2
ns
tc(EKO)
tw(EKOH)
Cycle time, ECLKOUT
tw(EKOL)
tt(EKO)
Transition time, ECLKOUT
2
td(EKIH-EKOH) Delay time, ECLKIN high to ECLKOUT high
td(EKIL-EKOL) Delay time, ECLKIN low to ECLKOUT low
1
7
1
6.5
ns
1
7
1
6.5
ns
‡ The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
§ E = ECLKIN period in ns
¶ EH is the high period of ECLKIN in ns and EL is the low period of ECLKIN in ns.
ECLKIN
6
1
2
5
3
ECLKOUT
Figure 29. ECLKOUT Timings
74
UNIT
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
4
4
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING
timing requirements for asynchronous memory cycles†‡§ (see Figure 30−Figure 31) [C6711]
NO.
3
4
6
7
tsu(EDV-AREH)
th(AREH-EDV)
Setup time, EDx valid before ARE high
tsu(ARDY-EKOH)
th(EKOH-ARDY)
C6711−100
C6711−150
MIN
MIN
MAX
MAX
UNIT
13
9
ns
Hold time, EDx valid after ARE high
1
1
ns
Setup time, ARDY valid before ECLKOUT high
6
3
ns
1.7
1.7
ns
Hold time, ARDY valid after ECLKOUT high
timing requirements for asynchronous memory cycles†‡§ (see Figure 30−Figure 31) [C6711B]
C6711B-100
C6711BGFNA−100
NO.
MIN
3
4
6
7
tsu(EDV-AREH)
th(AREH-EDV)
Setup time, EDx valid before ARE high
tsu(ARDY-EKOH)
th(EKOH-ARDY)
MAX
C6711B−150
MIN
UNIT
MAX
13
9
ns
Hold time, EDx valid after ARE high
1
1
ns
Setup time, ARDY valid before ECLKOUT high
6
3
ns
2.5
2.5
ns
Hold time, ARDY valid after ECLKOUT high
timing requirements for asynchronous memory cycles†‡§ (see Figure 30−Figure 31) [11C/11D]
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
MIN
3
4
6
7
tsu(EDV-AREH)
th(AREH-EDV)
Setup time, EDx valid before ARE high
tsu(ARDY-EKOH)
th(EKOH-ARDY)
UNIT
MAX
6.5
ns
Hold time, EDx valid after ARE high
1
ns
Setup time, ARDY valid before ECLKOUT high
3
ns
2.3
ns
Hold time, ARDY valid after ECLKOUT high
† To ensure data setup time, simply program the strobe width wide enough. ARDY is internally synchronized. The ARDY signal is recognized in
the cycle for which the setup and hold time is met. To use ARDY as an asynchronous input, the pulse width of the ARDY signal should be wide
enough (e.g., pulse width = 2E) to ensure setup and hold time is met.
‡ RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
§ E = ECLKOUT period in ns
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
75
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for asynchronous memory
cycles†‡§ (see Figure 30–Figure 31) [C6711]
C6711−100
NO.
1
PARAMETER
MIN
C6711−150
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tosu(SELV-AREL)
Output setup time, select signals valid to ARE low
RS * E − 3
RS * E − 3
ns
2
toh(AREH-SELIV)
Output hold time, ARE high to select signals
invalid
RH * E − 3
RH * E − 3
ns
5
td(EKOH-AREV)
tosu(SELV-AWEL)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE valid
toh(AWEH-SELIV)
td(EKOH-AWEV)
Output hold time, AWE high to select signals invalid
8
9
10
1.5
Output setup time, select signals valid to AWE low
11
WS * E − 3
1.5
8
WS * E − 3
WH * E − 3
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE valid
1.5
ns
WH * E − 3
11
ns
ns
1.5
8
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for asynchronous memory
cycles†‡§ (see Figure 30–Figure 31) [C6711B]
NO.
C6711B−100
C6711BGFNA-100
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
C6711B−150
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tosu(SELV-AREL)
Output setup time, select signals valid to ARE low
RS * E − 3
RS * E − 3
ns
2
toh(AREH-SELIV)
Output hold time, ARE high to select signals
invalid
RH * E − 3
RH * E − 3
ns
5
td(EKOH-AREV)
tosu(SELV-AWEL)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE valid
toh(AWEH-SELIV)
td(EKOH-AWEV)
Output hold time, AWE high to select signals invalid
8
9
10
1
Output setup time, select signals valid to AWE low
11
WS * E − 3
WH * E − 3
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE valid
1
1
8
WS * E − 3
ns
WH * E − 3
11
ns
ns
1
8
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for asynchronous memory
cycles†‡§ (see Figure 30–Figure 31) [C6711C/C6711D]
NO.
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
PARAMETER
MIN
1
tosu(SELV-AREL)
toh(AREH-SELIV)
Output setup time, select signals valid to ARE low
RS*E − 1.7
Output hold time, ARE high to select signals invalid
RH*E − 1.7
td(EKOH-AREV)
tosu(SELV-AWEL)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE valid
Output setup time, select signals valid to AWE low
WS*E − 1.7
Output hold time, AWE high to select signals and EDx invalid
WH*E − 1.7
10
toh(AWEH-SELIV)
td(EKOH-AWEV)
11
tosu(EDV-AWEL)
Output setup time, ED valid to AWE low
2
5
8
9
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE valid
1.5
1.5
(WS−1)*E −
1.7
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
7
ns
ns
ns
7
ns
ns
† RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
‡ E = ECLKOUT period in ns
§ Select signals include: CEx, BE[3:0], EA[21:2], and AOE.
76
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
Setup = 2
Strobe = 3
Not Ready
Hold = 2
ECLKOUT
1
2
CEx
1
2
BE[3:0]
BE
1
2
EA[21:2]
Address
3
4
ED[31:0]
1
2
Read Data
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
5
5
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
7
6
7
6
ARDY
† AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 30. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
77
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
Setup = 2
Strobe = 3
Hold = 2
Not Ready
ECLKOUT
8
9
CEx
8
9
BE[3:0]
BE
8
9
EA[21:2]
Address
11
9
ED[31:0]
Write Data
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
10
10
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
7
6
7
6
ARDY
† AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 31. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing
78
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS-BURST MEMORY TIMING
timing requirements for synchronous-burst SRAM cycles† (see Figure 32) [C6711]
NO.
6
7
tsu(EDV-EKOH) Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUT high
th(EKOH-EDV) Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUT high
C6711-100
C6711-150
MIN
MIN
6
2.1‡
MAX
MAX
UNIT
2.5
2.1‡
ns
ns
timing requirements for synchronous-burst SRAM cycles† (see Figure 32) [C6711B]
C6711B-100
NO.
MIN
6
7
tsu(EDV-EKOH) Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUT high
th(EKOH-EDV) Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUT high
MAX
C6711BGFNA-100
C6711B-150
MIN
UNIT
MAX
6
2.5
ns
2.5
2.5
ns
timing requirements for synchronous-burst SRAM cycles† (see Figure 32) [C6711C/C6711D]
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
MIN
6
7
tsu(EDV-EKOH) Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUT high
th(EKOH-EDV) Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUT high
UNIT
MAX
1.5
ns
2.5
ns
† The C6711/11B/11C/11D SBSRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SBSRAM. Accesses default to incrementing
4-word bursts, but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain continuous
data flow.
‡ Make sure the external SBSRAM meets the timing specifications of the C6711 device. Delays or buffers may be needed to compensate for any
timing differences. IBIS analysis should be used to correctly model the system interface.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
79
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS-BURST MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous-burst SRAM
cycles†‡ (see Figure 32 and Figure 33) [C6711]
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
C6711-100
C6711-150
MIN
MAX
MIN
td(EKOH-CEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to CEx valid
td(EKOH-BEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx valid
1.5
11
1.5
td(EKOH-BEIV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx invalid
td(EKOH-EAV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx valid
1.5
td(EKOH-EAIV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx invalid
td(EKOH-ADSV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE/SDCAS/SSADS valid
1.5
1.5
11
1.5
td(EKOH-OEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE valid
td(EKOH-EDV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx valid
1.5
11
1.5
td(EKOH-EDIV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx invalid
td(EKOH-WEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE/SDWE/SSWE valid
1.5
PARAMETER
6.9§
11
1.5
1.5
11
1.5
ns
ns
ns
ns
6.9§
6.9§
ns
7.1§
ns
1.5
11
UNIT
ns
6.9§
11
1.5
MAX
6.9§
ns
ns
6.9§
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous-burst SRAM
cycles†‡ (see Figure 32 and Figure 33) [C6711B]
C6711B-100
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
PARAMETER
C6711BGFNA-100
C6711B-150
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
td(EKOH-CEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to CEx valid
td(EKOH-BEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx valid
1
11
1
8.5
1
7.5
ns
7.5
ns
td(EKOH-BEIV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx invalid
td(EKOH-EAV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx valid
1
td(EKOH-EAIV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx invalid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to
td(EKOH-ADSV)
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS valid
1
11
8.5
1
11
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to,
td(EKOH-OEV)
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE valid
td(EKOH-EDV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx valid
td(EKOH-EDIV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx invalid
8.5
1
ns
7.5
1
ns
ns
1
11
1
8.5
1
7.5
ns
1
11
1
8.5
1
7.5
ns
7.5
ns
11
1
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to
td(EKOH-WEV)
AWE/SDWE/SSWE valid
1
1
8.5
1
11
1
1
8.5
1
ns
7.5
ns
† The C6711/11B/11C/11D SBSRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SBSRAM. Accesses default to incrementing
4-word bursts, but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain continuous
data flow.
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as SSADS, SSOE, and SSWE, respectively, during SBSRAM
accesses.
§ Make sure the external SBSRAM meets the timing specifications of the C6711 device. Delays or buffers may be needed to compensate for any
timing differences. IBIS analysis should be used to correctly model the system interface.
80
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS-BURST MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous-burst SRAM
cycles†‡ (see Figure 32 and Figure 33) [C6711C/C6711D]
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
td(EKOH-CEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to CEx valid
td(EKOH-BEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx valid
1.2
7
ns
7
ns
td(EKOH-BEIV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx invalid
td(EKOH-EAV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx valid
1.2
td(EKOH-EAIV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx invalid
td(EKOH-ADSV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE/SDCAS/SSADS valid
1.2
1.2
7
ns
td(EKOH-OEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE valid
td(EKOH-EDV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx valid
1.2
7
ns
7
ns
td(EKOH-EDIV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx invalid
td(EKOH-WEV) Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE/SDWE/SSWE valid
1.2
ns
7
1.2
ns
ns
ns
7
ns
† The C6711/C6711B/C6711C/C6711D SBSRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SBSRAM. Accesses default to
incrementing 4-word bursts, but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain
continuous data flow.
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as SSADS, SSOE, and SSWE, respectively, during SBSRAM
accesses.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
81
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS-BURST MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
BE[3:0]
2
BE1
3
BE2
BE3
4
BE4
5
EA[21:2]
EA
6
ED[31:0]
7
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
8
8
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
9
9
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
† ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as SSADS, SSOE, and SSWE, respectively, during SBSRAM
accesses.
Figure 32. SBSRAM Read Timing
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
BE[3:0]
2
BE1
3
BE2
BE3
5
4
EA[21:2]
ED[31:0]
BE4
EA
10
Q1
8
11
Q2
Q3
Q4
8
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
12
12
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
† ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE operate as SSADS, SSOE, and SSWE, respectively, during SBSRAM
accesses.
Figure 33. SBSRAM Write Timing
82
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING
timing requirements for synchronous DRAM cycles† (see Figure 34) [C6711]
NO.
6
7
tsu(EDV-EKOH)
th(EKOH-EDV)
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUT high
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUT high
C6711-100
C6711-150
MIN
MIN
MAX
MAX
UNIT
6
2.5
ns
2.1
2.1
ns
timing requirements for synchronous DRAM cycles† (see Figure 34) [C6711B]
C6711B-100
NO.
MIN
6
7
tsu(EDV-EKOH)
th(EKOH-EDV)
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUT high
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUT high
MAX
C6711BGFNA-100
C6711B-150
MIN
UNIT
MAX
6
2.5
ns
2.5
2.5
ns
timing requirements for synchronous DRAM cycles† (see Figure 34) [C6711C/C6711D]
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
MIN
6
7
tsu(EDV-EKOH)
th(EKOH-EDV)
UNIT
MAX
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUT high
1.5
ns
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUT high
2.5
ns
† The C6711/11B/11C/11D SDRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SDRAM. Accesses default to incrementing 4-word
bursts, but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain continuous data flow.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
83
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous DRAM
cycles†‡ (see Figure 34−Figure 40) [C6711]
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
PARAMETER
C6711-100
C6711-150
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.5
11
1.5
6.9
ns
6.9
ns
UNIT
td(EKOH-CEV)
td(EKOH-BEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to CEx valid
td(EKOH-BEIV)
td(EKOH-EAV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx invalid
td(EKOH-EAIV)
td(EKOH-CASV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx invalid
1.5
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE/SDCAS/SSADS valid
1.5
td(EKOH-EDV)
td(EKOH-EDIV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx valid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx invalid
1.5
td(EKOH-WEV)
td(EKOH-RAS)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE/SDWE/SSWE valid
1.5
11
1.5
6.9
ns
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE valid
1.5
11
1.5
6.9
ns
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx valid
11
1.5
1.5
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx valid
11
ns
6.9
1.5
11
1.5
11
ns
ns
6.9
ns
7.1
ns
1.5
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous DRAM
cycles†‡ (see Figure 34−Figure 40) [C6711B]
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
C6711B-100
PARAMETER
C6711BGFNA-100
C6711B-150
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
11
1
8
ns
8
ns
td(EKOH-CEV)
td(EKOH-BEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to CEx valid
td(EKOH-BEIV)
td(EKOH-EAV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx invalid
td(EKOH-EAIV)
td(EKOH-CASV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx invalid
1
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE/SDCAS/SSADS valid
1
td(EKOH-EDV)
td(EKOH-EDIV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx valid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx invalid
1
td(EKOH-WEV)
td(EKOH-RAS)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE/SDWE/SSWE valid
1
11
1
8
ns
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE valid
1
11
1
8
ns
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx valid
11
1
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx valid
1
11
ns
8
1
11
1
11
ns
ns
8
ns
8
ns
1
ns
† The C6711/11B/11C/11D SDRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SDRAM. Accesses default to incrementing 4-word
bursts, but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain continuous data flow.
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
84
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous DRAM
cycles†‡ (see Figure 34−Figure 40) [C6711C/C6711D]
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1.5
7
ns
7
ns
td(EKOH-CEV)
td(EKOH-BEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to CEx valid
td(EKOH-BEIV)
td(EKOH-EAV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx invalid
td(EKOH-EAIV)
td(EKOH-CASV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx invalid
1.5
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to ARE/SDCAS/SSADS valid
1.5
td(EKOH-EDV)
td(EKOH-EDIV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx valid
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EDx invalid
1.5
td(EKOH-WEV)
td(EKOH-RAS)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to AWE/SDWE/SSWE valid
1.5
7
ns
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE valid
1.5
7
ns
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BEx valid
1.5
ns
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to EAx valid
7
ns
ns
7
ns
7
ns
ns
† The C6711/11B/11C/11D SDRAM interface takes advantage of the internal burst counter in the SDRAM. Accesses default to incrementing 4-word
bursts, but random bursts and decrementing bursts are done by interrupting bursts in progress. All burst types can sustain continuous data flow.
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
READ
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
2
BE1
BE[3:0]
EA[21:13]
EA[11:2]
4
Bank
5
4
Column
5
4
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
5
EA12
6
D1
ED[31:0]
7
D2
D3
D4
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
8
8
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
† ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 34. SDRAM Read Command (CAS Latency 3)
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
85
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
WRITE
ECLKOUT
1
2
CEx
2
3
4
BE[3:0]
BE1
4
BE2
BE3
BE4
D2
D3
D4
5
Bank
EA[21:13]
5
4
Column
EA[11:2]
4
5
EA12
9
10
9
ED[31:0]
D1
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
8
8
11
11
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
† ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 35. SDRAM Write Command
86
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
ACTV
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
BE[3:0]
4
Bank Activate
5
EA[21:13]
4
Row Address
5
EA[11:2]
4
Row Address
5
EA12
ED[31:0]
12
12
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
† ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 36. SDRAM ACTV Command
DCAB
ECLKOUT
1
1
4
5
12
12
11
11
CEx
BE[3:0]
EA[21:13, 11:2]
EA12
ED[31:0]
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
† ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 37. SDRAM DCAB Command
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
87
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
DEAC
ECLKOUT
1
1
CEx
BE[3:0]
4
5
Bank
EA[21:13]
EA[11:2]
4
5
12
12
11
11
EA12
ED[31:0]
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
† ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 38. SDRAM DEAC Command
REFR
ECLKOUT
1
1
12
12
8
8
CEx
BE[3:0]
EA[21:2]
EA12
ED[31:0]
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
† ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 39. SDRAM REFR Command
88
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
MRS
ECLKOUT
1
1
4
MRS value
5
12
12
8
8
11
11
CEx
BE[3:0]
EA[21:2]
ED[31:0]
AOE/SDRAS/SSOE†
ARE/SDCAS/SSADS†
AWE/SDWE/SSWE†
† ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 40. SDRAM MRS Command
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
89
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
HOLD/HOLDA TIMING
timing requirements for the HOLD/HOLDA cycles† (see Figure 41)
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
–100
–150
NO.
MIN
3
th(HOLDAL-HOLDL)
† E = ECLKIN period in ns
Hold time, HOLD low after HOLDA low
MAX
E
MIN
UNIT
MAX
E
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the HOLD/HOLDA cycles†‡
(see Figure 41) [C6711/C6711B]
NO.
–100
–150
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
4
5
td(HOLDL-EMHZ)
td(EMHZ-HOLDAL)
Delay time, HOLD low to EMIF Bus high impedance
td(HOLDH-EMLZ)
td(EMLZ-HOLDAH)
Delay time, HOLD high to EMIF Bus low impedance
Delay time, EMIF Bus high impedance to HOLDA low
Delay time, EMIF Bus low impedance to HOLDA high
UNIT
2E
MAX
§
ns
0
2E
ns
2E
7E
ns
0
2E
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the HOLD/HOLDA cycles†‡
(see Figure 41) [C6711C/C6711D]
NO.
11CGDPA-167
11C−200
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
4
5
td(HOLDL-EMHZ)
td(EMHZ-HOLDAL)
Delay time, HOLD low to EMIF Bus high impedance
td(HOLDH-EMLZ)
td(EMLZ-HOLDAH)
Delay time, HOLD high to EMIF Bus low impedance
Delay time, EMIF Bus high impedance to HOLDA low
Delay time, EMIF Bus low impedance to HOLDA high
11DGDPA-167
11D−200
11D−250
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
2E
§
2E
§
ns
−0.1
2E
0
2E
ns
2E
7E
2E
7E
ns
−1.5
2E
0
2E
ns
† E = ECLKIN period in ns
‡ EMIF Bus consists of CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ED[31:0], EA[21:2], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE.
§ All pending EMIF transactions are allowed to complete before HOLDA is asserted. If no bus transactions are occurring, then the minimum delay
time can be achieved. Also, bus hold can be indefinitely delayed by setting NOHOLD = 1.
External Requestor
Owns Bus
DSP Owns Bus
DSP Owns Bus
3
HOLD
2
5
HOLDA
EMIF Bus†
1
4
C67x
C67x
† EMIF Bus consists of CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ED[31:0], EA[21:2], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE, and AWE/SDWE/SSWE.
Figure 41. HOLD/HOLDA Timing
90
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
BUSREQ TIMING
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the BUSREQ cycles
(see Figure 42) [C6711/11B]
–100
NO.
1
PARAMETER
td(EKOH-BUSRV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BUSREQ valid
–150
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
2
11
1.5
11
UNIT
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the BUSREQ cycles
(see Figure 42) [C6711C/11D]
NO.
1
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
PARAMETER
td(EKOH-BUSRV)
Delay time, ECLKOUT high to BUSREQ valid
MIN
MAX
1.5
7.2
UNIT
ns
ECLKOUT
1
1
BUSREQ
Figure 42. BUSREQ Timing
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
91
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
RESET TIMING [C6711/11B]
timing requirements for reset† (see Figure 43)
–100
–150
NO.
MIN
UNIT
MAX
Width of the RESET pulse (PLL stable)‡
10P
ns
1
tw(RST)
Width of the RESET pulse (PLL needs to sync up)§
250
µs
14
tsu(HD)
th(HD)
Setup time, HD boot configuration bits valid before RESET high¶
Hold time, HD boot configuration bits valid after RESET high¶
2P
ns
15
2P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ This parameter applies to CLKMODE x1 when CLKIN is stable, and applies to CLKMODE x4 when CLKIN and PLL are stable.
§ This parameter applies to CLKMODE x4 only (it does not apply to CLKMODE x1). The RESET signal is not connected internally to the clock PLL
circuit. The PLL, however, may need up to 250 µs to stabilize following device power up or after PLL configuration has been changed. During
that time, RESET must be asserted to ensure proper device operation. See the clock PLL section for PLL lock times.
¶ HD[4:3] are the boot configuration pins during device reset.
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during reset†#|| (see Figure 43)
NO.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
–100
–150
−250 (6711D)
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
td(RSTL-ECKI)
td(RSTH-ECKI)
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKIN synchronized internally
2P + 3E
3P + 4E
ns
Delay time, RESET high to ECLKIN synchronized internally
2P + 3E
3P + 4E
ns
td(RSTL-EMIFZHZ)
td(RSTH-EMIFZV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF Z group high impedance
2P + 3E
td(RSTL-EMIFHIV)
td(RSTH-EMIFHV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF high group invalid
td(RSTL-EMIFLIV)
td(RSTH-EMIFLV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF low group invalid
td(RSTL-HIGHIV)
td(RSTH-HIGHV)
Delay time, RESET low to high group invalid
td(RSTL-ZHZ)
td(RSTH-ZV)
Delay time, RESET low to Z group high impedance
2P
ns
Delay time, RESET high to Z group valid
2P
ns
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF Z group valid
ns
3P + 4E
2P + 3E
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF high group valid
ns
3P + 4E
2P + 3E
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF low group valid
ns
ns
3P + 4E
2P
Delay time, RESET high to high group valid
ns
ns
ns
4P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
# E = ECLKIN period in ns
|| EMIF Z group consists of:
EA[21:2], ED[31:0], CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
EMIF high group consists of: HOLDA
EMIF low group consists of: BUSREQ
High group consists of:
HRDY and HINT
Z group consists of:
HD[15:0], CLKX0, CLKX1, FSX0, FSX1, DX0, DX1, CLKR0, CLKR1, FSR0, FSR1, TOUT0, and TOUT1.
92
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
RESET TIMING [C6711/11B] (CONTINUED)
CLKOUT1
CLKOUT2
1
14
15
RESET
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ECLKIN†
EMIF Z Group‡
EMIF High Group‡
EMIF Low Group‡
10
11
12
13
High Group‡
Z Group‡
HD[8, 4:3]§
† ECLKIN should be provided during reset in order to drive EMIF signals to the correct reset values. ECLKOUT continues to clock as long as
ECLKIN is provided.
‡ EMIF Z group consists of:
EA[21:2], ED[31:0], CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SSOE
EMIF high group consists of: HOLDA
EMIF low group consists of: BUSREQ
High group consists of:
HRDY and HINT
Z group consists of:
HD[15:0], CLKX0, CLKX1, FSX0, FSX1, DX0, DX1, CLKR0, CLKR1, FSR0, FSR1, TOUT0, and TOUT1.
§ HD[8, 4:3] are the endianness and boot configuration pins during device reset.
Figure 43. Reset Timing [C6711/11B]
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
93
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
RESET TIMING [C6711C/11D]
timing requirements for reset†‡ (see Figure 44)
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
MIN
1
13
tw(RST)
tsu(HD)
14
Pulse duration, RESET
Setup time, HD boot configuration bits valid before RESET high§
Hold time, HD boot configuration bits valid after RESET high§
UNIT
MAX
100
ns
2P
ns
th(HD)
2P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For the C6711C/C6711D device, the PLL is bypassed immediately after the device comes out of reset. The PLL Controller can be programmed
to change the PLL mode in software. For more detailed information on the PLL Controller, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Software-Programmable
Phase-Lock Loop (PLL) Controller Reference Guide (literature number SPRU233).
§ The Boot and device configurations bits are latched asynchronously when RESET is transitioning high. The Boot and device configurations bits
consist of: HD[8, 4:3].
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during reset¶ (see Figure 44)
NO.
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
PARAMETER
MIN
Delay time, external RESET high to internal reset
high and all signal groups valid#||
UNIT
MAX
512 x CLKIN
period
2
td(RSTH-ZV)
3a
td(RSTL-ECKOL)
td(RSTL-ECKOL)
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKOUT low (6711C)
0
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKOUT high impedance (6711D)
0
td(RSTH-ECKOV)
td(RSTL-CKO2IV)
Delay time, RESET high to ECLKOUT valid
Delay time, RESET low to CLKOUT2 invalid (6711C)
0
td(RSTL-CKO2IV)
td(RSTH-CKO2V)
Delay time, RESET low to CLKOUT2 high impedance (6711D)
0
td(RSTL-CKO3L)
td(RSTH-CKO3V)
Delay time, RESET low to CLKOUT3 low
td(RSTL-EMIFZHZ)
td(RSTL-EMIFLIV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF Z group high impedance||
0
ns
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF low group (BUSREQ) invalid||
Delay time, RESET low to Z group 1 high impedance||
0
ns
0
ns
Delay time, RESET low to Z group 2 high impedance||
0
3b
4
5a
5b
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
td(RSTL-Z1HZ)
td(RSTL-Z2HZ)
CLKMODE0 = 1
ns
ns
6P
Delay time, RESET high to CLKOUT2 valid
ns
ns
ns
6P
0
Delay time, RESET high to CLKOUT3 valid
ns
ns
ns
6P
ns
ns
¶ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns.
Note that while internal reset is asserted low, the CPU clock (SYSCLK1) period is equal to the input clock (CLKIN) period multiplied by 8. For
example, if the CLKIN period is 20 ns, then the CPU clock (SYSCLK1) period is 20 ns x 8 = 160 ns. Therefore, P = SYSCLK1 = 160 ns while
internal reset is asserted.
# The internal reset is stretched exactly 512 x CLKIN cycles if CLKIN is used (CLKMODE0 = 1). If the input clock (CLKIN) is not stable when RESET
is deasserted, the actual delay time may vary.
|| EMIF Z group consists of: EA[21:2], ED[31:0], CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE and
HOLDA
EMIF low group consists of: BUSREQ
Z group 1 consists of:
CLKR0, CLKR1, CLKX0, CLKX1, FSR0, FSR1, FSX0, FSX1, DX0, DX1, TOUT0, and TOUT1.
Z group 2 consists of:
All other HPI and GPIO signals
94
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
RESET TIMING [C6711C/11D] (CONTINUED)
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
CLKIN
ECLKIN
1
RESET
2
Internal Reset
Internal SYSCLK1
Internal SYSCLK2
Internal SYSCLK3
3
4
5
6
7
8
6711C ECLKOUT§
6711D ECLKOUT§
6711C CLKOUT2§
6711D CLKOUT2§
CLKOUT3
9
2
10
2
11
2
EMIF Z Group†
EMIF Low
Group†
Z Group 1†
2
12
Z Group 2†
Boot and Device
Configuration
Pins‡
13
14
† EMIF Z group consists of:
EA[21:2], ED[31:0], CE[3:0], BE[3:0], ARE/SDCAS/SSADS, AWE/SDWE/SSWE, AOE/SDRAS/SSOE and
HOLDA
EMIF low group consists of: BUSREQ
Z group 1 consists of:
CLKR0, CLKR1, CLKX0, CLKX1, FSR0, FSR1, FSX0, FSX1, DX0, DX1, TOUT0, and TOUT1.
Z group 2 consists of:
All other HPI and GPIO signals
‡ Boot and device configurations consist of: HD[8, 4:3].
Figure 44. Reset Timing [C6711C/11D]
Reset Phase 1: The RESET pin is asserted. During this time, all internal clocks are running at the CLKIN
frequency divide-by-8. The CPU is also running at the CLKIN frequency divide-by-8.
Reset Phase 2: The RESET pin is deasserted but the internal reset is stretched. During this time, all internal
clocks are running at the CLKIN frequency divide-by-8. The CPU is also running at the CLKIN frequency
divide-by-8.
Reset Phase 3: Both the RESET pin and internal reset are deasserted. During this time, all internal clocks are
running at their default divide-down frequency of CLKIN. The CPU clock (SYSCLK1) is running at CLKIN
frequency. The peripheral clock (SYSCLK2) is running at CLKIN frequency divide-by-2. The EMIF internal clock
source (SYSCLK3) is running at CLKIN frequency divide-by-2. SYSCLK3 is reflected on the ECLKOUT pin
(when EKSRC bit = 0 [default]). CLKOUT3 is running at CLKIN frequency divide-by-8.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
95
SGUS054A − AUGUST 2004 − REVISED SEPTEMBER 2005
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TIMING
timing requirements for external interrupts† (see Figure 45)
−100
−150
GDPA-150
NO.
MIN
1
2
tw(ILOW)
tw(IHIGH)
MIN
UNIT
MAX
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse low
2P
2P
ns
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse low
2P
4P
ns
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse high
2P
2P
ns
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse high
2P
4P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
2
1
EXT_INT, NMI
Figure 45. External/NMI Interrupt Timing
96
MAX
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE TIMING
timing requirements for host-port interface cycles†‡ (see Figure 46 through Figure 49) [C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
tsu(SELV-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-SELV)
Setup time, select signals¶ valid before HSTROBE low
Hold time, select signals¶ valid after HSTROBE low
5
6§
ns
tw(HSTBL)
tw(HSTBH)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low
4P
ns
Pulse duration, HSTROBE high between consecutive accesses
Setup time, select signals¶ valid before HAS low
4P
ns
5
ns
3
ns
5
6§
ns
2
ns
2
4§
ns
tsu(SELV-HASL)
th(HASL-SELV)
tsu(HDV-HSTBH)
th(HSTBH-HDV)
14
th(HRDYL-HSTBL)
18
tsu(HASL-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-HASL)
19
UNIT
MAX
Hold time, select signals¶ valid after HAS low
Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high
Hold time, HSTROBE low after HRDY low. HSTROBE should not be inactivated until
HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI writes will not complete properly.
Setup time, HAS low before HSTROBE low
Hold time, HAS low after HSTROBE low
ns
ns
ns
timing requirements for host-port interface cycles†‡ (see Figure 46, through Figure 49) [C6711B]
C6711B-100
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
tsu(SELV-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-SELV)
Setup time, select signals¶ valid before HSTROBE low
Hold time, select signals¶ valid after HSTROBE low
tw(HSTBL)
tw(HSTBH)
tsu(SELV-HASL)
th(HASL-SELV)
tsu(HDV-HSTBH)
th(HSTBH-HDV)
14
th(HRDYL-HSTBL)
18
tsu(HASL-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-HASL)
19
MAX
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
MIN
UNIT
MAX
5
5
ns
4
4
ns
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low
4P
4P
ns
Pulse duration, HSTROBE high between consecutive accesses
Setup time, select signals¶ valid before HAS low
4P
4P
ns
5
5
ns
Hold time, select signals¶ valid after HAS low
3
3
ns
Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high
5
5
ns
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high
3
3
ns
Hold time, HSTROBE low after HRDY low. HSTROBE should
not be inactivated until HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI
writes will not complete properly.
2
2
ns
Setup time, HAS low before HSTROBE low
2
2
ns
Hold time, HAS low after HSTROBE low
2
2
ns
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
§ Make sure the external host meets the timing specifications of the C6711 device. Delays or buffers may be needed to compensate for any timing
differences. IBIS analysis should be used to correctly model the system interface.
¶ Select signals include: HCNTL[1:0], HR/W, and HHWIL.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
97
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for host-port interface cycles†‡ (see Figure 46 through Figure 49)
[C6711C/C6711D]
11CGDPA-167
11C−200
NO.
MIN
1
2
tsu(SELV-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-SELV)
Setup time, select signals¶ valid before HSTROBE low
Hold time, select signals¶ valid after HSTROBE low
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low (host read access)
5
4
10P + 5.8
MAX
11DGDPA-167
11D−200
11D−250
MIN
UNIT
MAX
5
ns
4
ns
4P
ns
3
tw(HSTBL)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low (host write access)
4P
4P
ns
4
tw(HSTBH)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE high between consecutive
accesses
4P
4P
ns
10
tsu(SELV-HASL)
th(HASL-SELV)
Setup time, select signals¶ valid before HAS low
Hold time, select signals¶ valid after HAS low
5
5
ns
3
3
ns
tsu(HDV-HSTBH)
th(HSTBH-HDV)
Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high
5
5
ns
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high
3
3
ns
Hold time, HSTROBE low after HRDY low. HSTROBE should
not be inactivated until HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI
writes will not complete properly.
2
2
ns
Setup time, HAS low before HSTROBE low
2
2
ns
Hold time, HAS low after HSTROBE low
2
2
ns
11
12
13
14
th(HRDYL-HSTBL)
18
tsu(HASL-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-HASL)
19
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
§ Make sure the external host meets the timing specifications of the C6711 device. Delays or buffers may be needed to compensate for any timing
differences. IBIS analysis should be used to correctly model the system interface.
¶ Select signals include: HCNTL[1:0], HR/W, and HHWIL.
98
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during host-port interface
cycles†‡ (see Figure 46 through Figure 49) [C6711]
NO.
C6711-100
C6711-150
PARAMETER
MIN
Delay time, HCS to HRDY§
1
6
td(HCS-HRDY)
td(HSTBL-HRDYH)
MAX
18¶
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY high#
3
18¶
7
td(HSTBL-HDLZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD low impedance for an HPI read
8
Delay time, HD valid to HRDY low
9
td(HDV-HRDYL)
toh(HSTBH-HDV)
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high
3
15
td(HSTBH-HDHZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HD high impedance
5
2
UNIT
ns
ns
ns
2P−4
ns
ns
3
18¶
18¶
ns
ns
16
td(HSTBL-HDV)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid
3
18¶
17
td(HSTBH-HRDYH)
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HRDY high||
3
18¶
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during host-port interface
cycles†‡ (see Figure 46 through Figure 49) [C6711B]
C6711B-100
NO.
5
6
PARAMETER
td(HCS-HRDY)
td(HSTBL-HRDYH)
MIN
C6711BGFNA-100
MAX
C6711B-150
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Delay time, HCS to HRDY§
1
15
1
13
1
12
ns
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY high#
3
15
3
13
3
12
ns
2
2
2
ns
2P − 4
2P − 4
2P − 4
ns
7
td(HSTBL-HDLZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD low
impedance for an HPI read
8
td(HDV-HRDYL)
Delay time, HD valid to HRDY low
9
toh(HSTBH-HDV)
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE
high
3
15
3
13
3
12
ns
15
td(HSTBH-HDHZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HD high
impedance
3
15
3
13
3
12
ns
16
td(HSTBL-HDV)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid
3
15
3
13
3
12
ns
17
td(HSTBH-HRDYH) Delay time, HSTROBE high to HRDY high||
3
15
3
13
3
12
ns
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
§ HCS enables HRDY, and HRDY is always low when HCS is high. The case where HRDY goes high when HCS falls indicates that HPI is busy
completing a previous HPID write or READ with autoincrement.
¶ Make sure the external host meets the timing specifications of the C6711 device. Delays or buffers may be needed to compensate for any timing
differences. IBIS analysis should be used to correctly model the system interface.
# This parameter is used during an HPID read. At the beginning of the first half-word transfer on the falling edge of HSTROBE, the HPI sends the
request to the EDMA internal address generation hardware, and HRDY remains high until the EDMA internal address generation hardware loads
the requested data into HPID.
|| This parameter is used after the second half-word of an HPID write or autoincrement read. HRDY remains low if the access is not an HPID write
or autoincrement read. Reading or writing to HPIC or HPIA does not affect the HRDY signal.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
99
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during host-port interface
cycles†‡ (see Figure 46 through Figure 49) [C6711C/C6711D]
NO.
11CGDPA-167
11C−200
PARAMETER
11DGDPA-167
11D−200
11D−250
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
Delay time, HCS to HRDY§
1
15
1
12
ns
6
td(HCS-HRDY)
td(HSTBL-HRDYH)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY high#
3
15
3
12
ns
7
td(HSTBL-HDLZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD low impedance for an HPI read
2
8
td(HDV-HRDYL)
toh(HSTBH-HDV)
Delay time, HD valid to HRDY low
9
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high
3
12
3
12
ns
15
td(HSTBH-HDHZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HD high impedance
2
12
3
12
ns
16
td(HSTBL-HDV)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid
3
3
12.5
ns
5
2
2P − 4
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HRDY high||
MAX
ns
2P − 4
10P + 5.8
ns
17
td(HSTBH-HRDYH)
3
15
3
12
ns
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
§ HCS enables HRDY, and HRDY is always low when HCS is high. The case where HRDY goes high when HCS falls indicates that HPI is busy
completing a previous HPID write or READ with autoincrement.
¶ Make sure the external host meets the timing specifications of the C6711C device. Delays or buffers may be needed to compensate for any timing
differences. IBIS analysis should be used to correctly model the system interface.
# This parameter is used during an HPID read. At the beginning of the first half-word transfer on the falling edge of HSTROBE, the HPI sends the
request to the EDMA internal address generation hardware, and HRDY remains high until the EDMA internal address generation hardware loads
the requested data into HPID.
|| This parameter is used after the second half-word of an HPID write or autoincrement read. HRDY remains low if the access is not an HPID write
or autoincrement read. Reading or writing to HPIC or HPIA does not affect the HRDY signal.
100
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
HAS
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
4
3
HSTROBE†
3
HCS
15
9
7
15
9
16
HD[15:0] (output)
1st halfword
5
2nd halfword
8
17
5
HRDY (case 1)
6
8
17
5
HRDY (case 2)
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 46. HPI Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
HAS†
19
11
19
10
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
11
10
10
HR/W
11
11
10
10
HHWIL
4
3
HSTROBE‡
18
18
HCS
15
7
9
15
16
9
HD[15:0] (output)
5
1st half-word
8
2nd half-word
17
5
17
5
HRDY (case 1)
8
HRDY (case 2)
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 47. HPI Read Timing (HAS Used)
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
101
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
HAS
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
3
3
4
14
HSTROBE†
HCS
12
12
13
13
HD[15:0] (input)
1st halfword
5
17
2nd halfword
5
HRDY
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 48. HPI Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
HAS†
19
19
11
11
10
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
11
10
10
HR/W
11
11
10
10
HHWIL
3
14
HSTROBE‡
4
18
18
HCS
12
13
12
13
HD[15:0] (input)
5
1st half-word
2nd half-word
17
HRDY
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 49. HPI Write Timing (HAS Used)
102
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
5
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING
timing requirements for McBSP†‡ (see Figure 50) [C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
2
3
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X ext
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X ext
MIN
2P§
CLKR int
0.5tc(CKRX) − 1
20
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL) Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
CLKR ext
1
CLKR int
6
6
th(CKRL-FRH) Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
22
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
3
8
th(CKRL-DRV) Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
CLKR ext
4
CLKX int
23
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL) Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
CLKX ext
1
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
CLKX int
6
CLKX ext
3
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
timing requirements for McBSP†‡ (see Figure 50) [C6711B]
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
NO.
2
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X ext
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X ext
MIN
2P§
3
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
CLKR int
0.5tc(CKRX) − 1
20
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL) Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
CLKR ext
1
CLKR int
6
6
th(CKRL-FRH) Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
CLKR ext
5
CLKR int
22
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
3
8
th(CKRL-DRV) Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
CLKR ext
5
CLKX int
23
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL) Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
CLKX ext
1
CLKX int
6
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
CLKX ext
3
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
† CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
§ The minimum CLKR/X period is twice the CPU cycle time (2P). This means that the maximum bit rate for communications between the McBSP
and other device is 75 Mbps for 150 MHz CPU clock or 50 Mbps for 100 MHz CPU clock; where the McBSP is either the master or the slave.
Care must be taken to ensure that the AC timings specified in this data sheet are met. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP
communications is 33 Mbps; therefore, the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle is either twice the CPU cycle time (2P), or 30 ns (33 MHz), whichever
value is larger. For example, when running parts at 150 MHz (P = 6.7 ns), use 33 ns as the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle (by setting the appropriate
CLKGDV ratio or external clock source). When running parts at 60 MHz (P = 16.67 ns), use 2P = 33 ns (30 MHz) as the minimum CLKR/X clock
cycle. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications applies when the serial port is a master of the clock and frame syncs (with
CLKR connected to CLKX, FSR connected to FSX, CLKXM = FSXM = 1, and CLKRM = FSRM = 0) in data delay 1 or 2 mode (R/XDATDLY =
01b or 10b) and the other device the McBSP communicates to is a slave.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
103
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for McBSP†‡ (see Figure 50) [C6711C/C6711D]
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
2
3
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
6
th(CKRL-FRH)
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
8
th(CKRL-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL)
Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
CLKR/X ext
MIN
2P§
CLKR/X ext
0.5 *tc(CKRX) −1¶
CLKR int
9
CLKR ext
1
CLKR int
6
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
8
CLKR ext
0
CLKR int
3
CLKR ext
4
CLKX int
9
CLKX ext
1
CLKX int
6
CLKX ext
3
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
† CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
§ The minimum CLKR/X period is twice the CPU cycle time (2P) and not faster than 75 Mbps (13.3 ns). This means that the maximum bit rate for
communications between the McBSP and other devices is 75 Mbps for 167-MHz and 200-MHz CPU clocks or 50 Mbps for 100-MHz CPU clock;
where the McBSP is either the master or the slave. Care must be taken to ensure that the AC timings specified in this data sheet are met. The
maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications is 67 Mbps; therefore, the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle is either twice the CPU cycle
time (2P), or 15 ns (67 MHz), whichever value is larger. For example, when running parts at 167 MHz (P = 6 ns), use 15 ns as the minimum
CLKR/X clock cycle (by setting the appropriate CLKGDV ratio or external clock source). When running parts at 60 MHz (P = 16.67 ns), use 2P =
33 ns (30 MHz) as the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications applies when the serial port
is a master of the clock and frame syncs (with CLKR connected to CLKX, FSR connected to FSX, CLKXM = FSXM = 1, and CLKRM = FSRM = 0)
in data delay 1 or 2 mode (R/XDATDLY = 01b or 10b) and the other device the McBSP communicates to is a slave.
¶ This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
104
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP†‡ (see Figure 50)
[C6711]
NO.
C6711-100
C6711-150
PARAMETER
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal CLKR/X generated from
CLKS input
UNIT
MIN
MAX
4
26
2P§¶
C − 1#
C + 1#
ns
ns
1
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
2
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
3
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
CLKR int
−11
3
CLKX int
−11
3
9
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
CLKX ext
3
9
−9
4
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
CLKX int
12
CLKX ext
CLKX int
3
−9+ D1||
9
7+ D2||
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
CLKX ext
3 + D1||
19 + D2||
14
td(FXH-DXV)
ns
ns
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
−1
3
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
3
9
ns
ns
ns
ns
† CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
‡ Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
¶ The minimum CLKR/X period is twice the CPU cycle time (2P). This means that the maximum bit rate for communications between the McBSP
and other device is 75 Mbps for 150 MHz CPU clock or 50 Mbps for 100 MHz CPU clock; where the McBSP is either the master or the slave.
Care must be taken to ensure that the AC timings specified in this data sheet are met. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP
communications is 33 Mbps; therefore, the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle is either twice the CPU cycle time (2P), or 30 ns (33 MHz), whichever
value is larger. For example, when running parts at 150 MHz (P = 6.7 ns), use 33 ns as the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle (by setting the appropriate
CLKGDV ratio or external clock source). When running parts at 60 MHz (P = 16.67 ns), use 2P = 33 ns (30 MHz) as the minimum CLKR/X clock
cycle. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications applies when the serial port is a master of the clock and frame syncs (with
CLKR connected to CLKX, FSR connected to FSX, CLKXM = FSXM = 1, and CLKRM = FSRM = 0) in data delay 1 or 2 mode (R/XDATDLY =
01b or 10b) and the other device the McBSP communicates to is a slave.
# C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see ¶ footnote above).
|| Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
If DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
If DXENA = 1, then D1 = 2P, D2 = 4P
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
105
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP†‡ (see Figure 50)
[C6711B]
NO.
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
PARAMETER
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal CLKR/X generated from
CLKS input
MIN
MAX
4
26
2P§¶
C − 1#
C + 1#
ns
ns
1
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
2
Cycle time, CLKR/X
3
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
CLKR int
−11
3
CLKX int
−10
3.5
9
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
CLKX ext
3
16
−9
4
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
CLKX int
12
CLKX ext
CLKX int
3
−9+ D1||
9
8 + D2||
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
CLKX ext
3 + D1||
26 + D2||
14
td(FXH-DXV)
CLKR/X int
UNIT
ns
ns
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
−1
3
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
3
9
ns
ns
ns
ns
† CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
‡ Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 150 MHz, use P = 6.7 ns.
¶ The minimum CLKR/X period is twice the CPU cycle time (2P). This means that the maximum bit rate for communications between the McBSP
and other device is 75 Mbps for 150 MHz CPU clock or 50 Mbps for 100 MHz CPU clock; where the McBSP is either the master or the slave.
Care must be taken to ensure that the AC timings specified in this data sheet are met. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP
communications is 33 Mbps; therefore, the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle is either twice the CPU cycle time (2P), or 30 ns (33 MHz), whichever
value is larger. For example, when running parts at 150 MHz (P = 6.7 ns), use 33 ns as the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle (by setting the appropriate
CLKGDV ratio or external clock source). When running parts at 60 MHz (P = 16.67 ns), use 2P = 33 ns (30 MHz) as the minimum CLKR/X clock
cycle. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications applies when the serial port is a master of the clock and frame syncs (with
CLKR connected to CLKX, FSR connected to FSX, CLKXM = FSXM = 1, and CLKRM = FSRM = 0) in data delay 1 or 2 mode (R/XDATDLY =
01b or 10b) and the other device the McBSP communicates to is a slave.
# C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see ¶ footnote above).
|| Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
If DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
If DXENA = 1, then D1 = 2P, D2 = 4P
106
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP†‡ (see Figure 50)
[C6711C/C6711D]
NO.
11DGDPA-167
11D−200
11D−250
11CGDPA-167
11C−200
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.8
10
1.8
10
1
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal
CLKR/X generated from CLKS input
2
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
2P§¶
3
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or
CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
C − 1#
C + 1#
C − 1#
C + 1#
ns
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal
FSR valid
CLKR int
−2
3
−2
3
ns
−2
3
−2
3
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal
FSX valid
CLKX int
9
CLKX ext
2
9
2
9
−1
4
−1
4
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance
following last data bit from CLKX
high
CLKX int
12
CLKX ext
1.5
10
1.5
10
CLKX int
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
−3.2 + D1||
0.5 + D1||
4 + D2||
10+ D2||
−3.2 + D1||
0.5 + D1||
4 + D2||
10+ D2||
13
14
td(FXH-DXV)
2P§¶
ns
ns
ns
ns
CLKX ext
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
−1.5
4.5
−1
7.5
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
2
9
2
11.5
ns
ns
† CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
‡ Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
¶ The minimum CLKR/X period is twice the CPU cycle time (2P) and not faster than 75 Mbps (13.3 ns). This means that the maximum bit rate for
communications between the McBSP and other devices is 75 Mbps for 167-MHz and 200-MHz CPU clocks or 50 Mbps for 100-MHz CPU clock;
where the McBSP is either the master or the slave. Care must be taken to ensure that the AC timings specified in this data sheet are met. The
maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications is 67 Mbps; therefore, the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle is either twice the CPU cycle
time (2P), or 15 ns (67 MHz), whichever value is larger. For example, when running parts at 167 MHz (P = 6 ns), use 15 ns as the minimum
CLKR/X clock cycle (by setting the appropriate CLKGDV ratio or external clock source). When running parts at 60 MHz (P = 16.67 ns), use 2P =
33 ns (30 MHz) as the minimum CLKR/X clock cycle. The maximum bit rate for McBSP-to-McBSP communications applies when the serial port
is a master of the clock and frame syncs (with CLKR connected to CLKX, FSR connected to FSX, CLKXM = FSXM = 1, and CLKRM = FSRM
= 0) in data delay 1 or 2 mode (R/XDATDLY = 01b or 10b) and the other device the McBSP communicates to is a slave.
# C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see ¶ footnote above).
|| Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
If DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
If DXENA = 1, then D1 = 2P, D2 = 4P
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
107
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
CLKS
1
2
3
3
CLKR
4
4
FSR (int)
5
6
FSR (ext)
7
8
DR
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
2
3
3
CLKX
9
FSX (int)
11
10
FSX (ext)
FSX (XDATDLY=00b)
14
13
Bit(n-1)
12
DX
Bit 0
13
(n-2)
Figure 50. McBSP Timings
108
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
(n-3)
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for FSR when GSYNC = 1 (see Figure 51)
–100
–150
NO.
MIN
1
2
tsu(FRH-CKSH)
th(CKSH-FRH)
MAX
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
MIN
UNIT
MAX
Setup time, FSR high before CLKS high
4
4
ns
Hold time, FSR high after CLKS high
4
4
ns
CLKS
1
2
FSR external
CLKR/X (no need to resync)
CLKR/X (needs resync)
Figure 51. FSR Timing When GSYNC = 1
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
109
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 52)
[C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXL)
th(CKXL-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low
MAX
SLAVE
MIN
UNIT
MAX
26
2 − 6P
ns
4
6 + 12P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 52)
[C6711B]
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXL)
th(CKXL-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low
MAX
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
26
2 − 6P
ns
4
14 + 12P
ns
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 52)
[C6711C/C6711D]
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXL)
th(CKXL-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low
MASTER
SLAVE
MIN
MIN
MAX
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
MAX
12
2 − 6P
ns
4
5 + 12P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
110
UNIT
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 52) [C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
T−9
T+9
ns
L−9
L+9
ns
−9
9
L−9
L+9
2
th(CKXL-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXH)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
FSX high
2P + 3
6P + 20
ns
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
4P + 2
8P + 20
ns
1
6P + 4
10P + 20
ns
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 52) [C6711B]
NO.
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
MASTER§
SLAVE
PARAMETER
2
th(CKXL-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXH)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from CLKX low
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from FSX high
1
MIN
MAX
T − 10
T + 10
L − 10
L + 10
−10
10
L − 10
L + 10
MIN
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
6P + 4
−10P + 25
ns
ns
2P + 3
6P + 25
ns
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
4P + 2
8P + 25
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
111
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 52) [C6711C/C6711D]
11DGDPA-167
11D−200
11D−250
MASTER§
SLAVE
11CGDPA-167
11C−200
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
th(CKXL-FXL)
Hold time, FSX low
after CLKX low¶
T−2
T+3
T−2
T+3
ns
2
td(FXL-CKXH)
Delay time, FSX low to
CLKX high#
L−2
L+3
L−2
L+3
ns
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high
to DX valid
−3
4
−3
4
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high
impedance following
last data bit from CLKX
low
L−4
L+3
L−2
L+3
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high
impedance following
last data bit from FSX
high
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to
DX valid
6
6P + 2
10P + 17
6P + 2
10P + 17
ns
ns
2P + 1.5
6P + 17
2P + 3
6P + 17
ns
4P + 2
8P + 17
4P + 2
8P + 17
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
DX
8
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 52. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0
112
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 53)
[C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
MAX
SLAVE
MIN
UNIT
MAX
26
2 − 6P
ns
4
6 + 12P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 53)
[C6711B]
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
NO.
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
MASTER
SLAVE
MIN
MIN
MAX
UNIT
MAX
26
2 − 6P
ns
4
14 + 12P
ns
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 53)
[C6711C/C6711D]
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
MAX
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
12
2 − 6P
ns
4
5 + 12P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
113
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 53) [C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
MIN
2
th(CKXL-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXH)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
6
7
1
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
L−9
L+9
ns
T−9
T+9
ns
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
−9
9
6P + 4
10P + 20
ns
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
−9
9
6P + 3
10P + 20
ns
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
H−9
H+9
4P + 2
8P + 20
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 53) [C6711B]
NO.
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
MASTER§
SLAVE
PARAMETER
MIN
2
th(CKXL-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXH)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
6
7
1
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
L − 10
L + 10
ns
T − 10
T + 10
ns
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
−10
10
6P + 4
10P + 25
ns
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
−10
10
6P + 3
10P + 25
ns
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
H − 10
H + 10
4P + 2
8P + 25
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
114
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 53) [C6711C/C6711D]
11DGDPA-167
11D−200
11D−250
§
MASTER
SLAVE
11CGDPA-167
11C−200
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
L−2
MIN
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MAX
L+3
L−2
L+3
ns
T−2
T+3
T−2
T+3
ns
1
th(CKXL-FXL)
Hold time, FSX low after
CLKX low¶
2
td(FXL-CKXH)
Delay time, FSX low to
CLKX high#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to
DX valid
−3
4
6P + 2
10P +
17
−3
4
6P + 2
10P +
17
ns
6
Disable time, DX high
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ) impedance following last
data bit from CLKX low
−4
4
6P + 1.5
10P +
17
−2
4
6P + 3
10P +
17
ns
7
td(FXL-DXV)
H−2
H+4
4P + 2
8P + 17
H−2
H + 6.5
4P + 2
8P + 17
ns
Delay time, FSX low to
DX valid
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
6
Bit 0
7
FSX
DX
3
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 53. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
115
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 54)
[C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
MAX
SLAVE
MIN
UNIT
MAX
26
2 − 6P
ns
4
6 + 12P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 54)
[C6711B]
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
NO.
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
MASTER
SLAVE
MIN
MIN
MAX
UNIT
MAX
26
2 − 6P
ns
4
14 + 12P
ns
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 54)
[C6711C/C6711D]
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
MAX
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
MIN
MAX
12
2 − 6P
ns
4
5 + 12P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
116
UNIT
SLAVE
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 54) [C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
MIN
UNIT
SLAVE
MAX
MIN
MAX
2
th(CKXH-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXL)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
FSX high
2P + 3
6P + 20
ns
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
4P + 2
8P + 20
ns
1
T−9
T+9
ns
H−9
H+9
ns
−9
9
H−9
H+9
6P + 4
10P + 20
ns
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 54) [C6711B]
NO.
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
MASTER§
SLAVE
PARAMETER
MIN
UNIT
MIN
MAX
T − 10
T + 10
MAX
ns
H − 10
H + 10
ns
−10
10
H − 10
H + 10
2
th(CKXH-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXL)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from CLKX high
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from FSX high
2P + 3
6P + 25
ns
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
4P + 2
8P + 25
ns
1
6P + 4
10P + 25
ns
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
117
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 54) [C6711C/C6711D]
11DGDPA-167
11D−200
11D−250
§
MASTER
SLAVE
11CGDPA-167
11C−200
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
1
th(CKXH-FXL)
Hold time, FSX low
after CLKX high¶
2
td(FXL-CKXL)
Delay time, FSX low to
CLKX low#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low
to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high
impedance following
last data bit from CLKX
high
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high
impedance following
last data bit from FSX
high
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to
DX valid
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
T−2
MIN
MIN
MAX
T+3
T−2
T+3
ns
H−2
H+3
H−2
H+3
ns
−3
4
−3
4
H − 3.6
H+3
H−2
H+3
6P + 2
MAX
10P + 17
MIN
UNIT
6P + 2
MAX
10P + 17
ns
ns
2P + 1.5
6P + 17
2P + 3
6P + 17
ns
4P + 2
8P + 17
4P + 2
8P + 17
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
DX
8
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 54. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1
118
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 55)
[C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
MAX
SLAVE
MIN
UNIT
MAX
26
2 − 6P
ns
4
6 + 12P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 55)
[C6711B]
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
NO.
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
MASTER
SLAVE
MIN
MIN
MAX
UNIT
MAX
26
2 − 6P
ns
4
14 + 12P
ns
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI master or slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 55)
[C6711C/C6711D]
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
MAX
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
12
2 − 6P
ns
4
5 + 12P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
119
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 55) [C6711]
C6711-100
C6711-150
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
H−9
H+9
ns
T−9
T+9
ns
2
th(CKXH-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXL)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
−9
9
6P + 4
10P + 20
ns
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
−9
9
6P + 3
10P + 20
ns
7
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
L−9
L+9
4P + 2
8P + 20
ns
1
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 55) [C6711B]
NO.
PARAMETER
1
C6711B-100
C6711B-150
C6711BGFNA-100
MASTER§
SLAVE
MIN
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MAX
H − 10
H + 10
ns
T − 10
T + 10
ns
2
th(CKXH-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXL)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
−10
10
6P + 4
10P + 25
ns
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from CLKX high
−10
10
6P + 3
10P + 25
ns
7
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
L − 10
L + 10
4P + 2
8P + 25
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
120
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI master or
slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 55) [C6711C/C6711D]
11DGDPA-167
11D−200
11D−250
§
MASTER
SLAVE
11CGDPA-167
11C−200
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
H−2
MIN
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MAX
H+3
H−2
H+3
ns
T−2
T+3
ns
1
th(CKXH-FXL)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high¶
2
td(FXL-CKXL)
Delay time, FSX low to
CLKX low#
T−2
T+3
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high
to DX valid
−3
4
6P + 2
10P + 17
−3
4
6P + 2
10P + 17
ns
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high
impedance following
last data bit from CLKX
high
−3.6
4
6P + 1.5
10P + 17
−2
4
6P + 3
10P + 17
ns
7
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to
DX valid
L−2
L+4
4P + 2
8P + 17
L−2
L + 6.5
4P + 2
8P + 17
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 2P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
DX
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 55. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
121
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
TIMER TIMING
timing requirements for timer inputs† (see Figure 56)
NO.
MIN
1
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
–100
–150
tw(TINPH)
tw(TINPL)
Pulse duration, TINP high
2
Pulse duration, TINP low
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
2P
2P
ns
2P
2P
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for timer outputs†
(see Figure 56)
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
3
4
tw(TOUTH)
tw(TOUTL)
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
Pulse duration, TOUT high
4P −3
4P − 3
ns
Pulse duration, TOUT low
4P −3
4P − 3
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
2
1
TINPx
4
3
TOUTx
Figure 56. Timer Timing
122
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
–100
–150
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT (GPIO) PORT TIMING [C6711C/C6711D ONLY]
timing requirements for GPIO inputs†‡ (see Figure 57)
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
NO.
MIN
1
tw(GPIH)
tw(GPIL)
Pulse duration, GPIx high
UNIT
MAX
4P
ns
2
Pulse duration, GPIx low
4P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
‡ The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have the DSP recognize the GPIx
changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIx duration must be extended to at least 24P to allow the DSP enough time to access
the GPIO register through the CFGBUS.
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for GPIO outputs†§
(see Figure 57)
NO.
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
PARAMETER
MIN
3
tw(GPOH)
tw(GPOL)
Pulse duration, GPOx high
12P − 3
UNIT
MAX
ns
4
Pulse duration, GPOx low
12P − 3
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 250 MHz, use P = 4 ns.
§ The number of CFGBUS cycles between two back-to-back CFGBUS writes to the GPIO register is 12 SYSCLK1 cycles; therefore, the minimum
GPOx pulse width is 12P.
2
1
GPIx
4
3
GPOx
Figure 57. GPIO Port Timing
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
123
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
JTAG TEST-PORT TIMING
timing requirements for JTAG test port (see Figure 58)
NO.
MIN
1
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
–100
–150
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
Cycle time, TCK
35
35
ns
3
tc(TCK)
tsu(TDIV-TCKH)
Setup time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid before TCK high
10
10
ns
4
th(TCKH-TDIV)
Hold time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid after TCK high
9
7
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for JTAG test port
(see Figure 58)
NO.
2
PARAMETER
td(TCKL-TDOV)
GDPA-167
−200
−250 (6711D)
–100
–150
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
–3
18
0
15
1
TCK
2
2
TDO
4
3
TDI/TMS/TRST
Figure 58. JTAG Test-Port Timing
124
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
UNIT
ns
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MECHANICAL DATA [C6711/11B ONLY]
GFN (S-PBGA-N256)
PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY
27,20
SQ
26,80
24,70
SQ
23,80
24,13 TYP
1,27
0,635
A1 Corner
0,635
1,27
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
10
11 13 15 17 19
12 14 16 18 20
Bottom View
2,32 MAX
1,17 NOM
Seating Plane
0,40
0,30
0,90
0,60
0,15 M
0,15
0,70
0,50
4040185-2/D 02/02
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. Falls within JEDEC MO-151
thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) [C6711/11B only]
°C/W
Air Flow (m/s)†
RΘJC
RΘJA
Junction-to-case
6.4
N/A
Junction-to-free air
25.5
0.0
RΘJA
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
23.1
0.5
Junction-to-free air
22.3
1.0
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
† m/s = meters per second
21.2
2.0
NO
1
2
3
4
5
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
125
SGUS054 − AUGUST 2004
MECHANICAL DATA [C6711C/11D ONLY]
GDP (S−PBGA−N272)
PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY
27,20
SQ
26,80
24,20
SQ
23,80
24,13 TYP
1,27
0,635
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
A1 Corner
1,27
0,635
3
1
2
1,22
1,12
5
4
7
6
9
8
11 13 15 17 19
10 12 14 16 18 20
Bottom View
2,57 MAX
Seating Plane
0,90
0,60
0,65
0,57
0,10
0,15
0,70
0,50
4204396/A 04/02
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. Falls within JEDEC MO-151
thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) [C6711C/11D only]
NO
°C/W
Air Flow (m/s)†
Two Signals, Two Planes (4-Layer Board)
1
RΘJC
Junction-to-case
9.7
N/A
2
PsiJT
Junction-to-package top
1.5
0.0
3
RΘJB
RΘJA
Junction-to-board
19
N/A
Junction-to-free air
22
0.0
RΘJA
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
21
0.5
Junction-to-free air
20
1.0
Junction-to-free air
19
2.0
8
RΘJA
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
18
4.0
9
PsiJB
Junction-to-board
16
0.0
4
5
6
7
† m/s = meters per second
126
•
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
POST OFFICE BOX 1443 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
•
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
5-Feb-2007
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device
Status (1)
Package
Type
Package
Drawing
Pins Package Eco Plan (2)
Qty
SM32C6711DGDPA16EP
ACTIVE
BGA
GDP
272
40
TBD
Call TI
Level-3-220C-168 HR
SM32C6711DGDPI20EP
ACTIVE
BGA
GDP
272
40
TBD
Call TI
Level-3-220C-168 HR
V62/04753-04YA
ACTIVE
BGA
GDP
272
40
TBD
Call TI
Level-3-220C-168 HR
V62/04753-16YA
ACTIVE
BGA
GDP
272
40
TBD
Call TI
Level-3-220C-168 HR
Lead/Ball Finish
MSL Peak Temp (3)
(1)
The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in
a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2)
Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check
http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements
for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered
at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and
package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS
compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame
retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material)
(3)
MSL, Peak Temp. -- The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder
temperature.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is
provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the
accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take
reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on
incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited
information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI
to Customer on an annual basis.
Addendum-Page 1
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications,
enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to
discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information
before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold
subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in
accordance with TI’s standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent
TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing
of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible
for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer
products and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent
right, copyright, mask work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine,
or process in which TI products or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party
products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or
other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual
property of TI.
Reproduction of information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without
alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices.
Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not
responsible or liable for such altered documentation.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for
that product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service
and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application
solutions:
Products
Applications
Amplifiers
amplifier.ti.com
Audio
www.ti.com/audio
Data Converters
dataconverter.ti.com
Automotive
www.ti.com/automotive
DSP
dsp.ti.com
Broadband
www.ti.com/broadband
Interface
interface.ti.com
Digital Control
www.ti.com/digitalcontrol
Logic
logic.ti.com
Military
www.ti.com/military
Power Mgmt
power.ti.com
Optical Networking
www.ti.com/opticalnetwork
Microcontrollers
microcontroller.ti.com
Security
www.ti.com/security
Low Power Wireless
www.ti.com/lpw
Telephony
www.ti.com/telephony
Mailing Address:
Video & Imaging
www.ti.com/video
Wireless
www.ti.com/wireless
Texas Instruments
Post Office Box 655303 Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2007, Texas Instruments Incorporated